m  -t/l 


4717 


./ 


Ai 

Al 

o  ! 
o  ! 

o ; 

4  i 

2 

3 

4 

6 

4 


;  c 


% 


rs 


,<i.-» 


;iSv 


1 


■%> 


PAN-PACIFIC  UNION 

First 
Pan-Pacific  Press 


i 


HONOLULU,  OCTOBER  21,  1921 


Program  and  Proceeding's 


"it m-.T".Tl 


I  •• 


v.. 


• 

PN     ' 
4717                  -       cif ic 

!fl! 

is 

..^                         ^^  da  S 

P19        conference. 

| 

. 

cop. 2      -, ,   .           rti„-i,. 

Southern  Branch 

of  the 

University  of  Californ 

ia 

Los  Angeles 

Form  L   1 

1>H 

Nfl*-''-r  I 

A-W 

* 

T^b 

oc>^.  £_ 

><Sv 

I 


This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


MAY   2  0  1925 


ji 


4)  A         5 

;   k  - 

2  Z   «   C 
•J  gX  v  41 

ft  —  "~" 

g  ..CJ 

of         n 

Eb.BJ< 


>  —  -    . 

i>    -      - 
*:  «      = 

.-35  = 


r  —  5j      y 


to  C  >*t  i  r 

r  •-  -<     U 

.5  «    — 
e  "7  •/■: '"'  II 

S  C        .  ~ 
=  £  .-■  C    . 

u      .r  i   S 

S  2  «  u  i 


.    :-  =  ■  = 
S  ft  _•  i  ti 

q°  S    0   4)  .'_' 

g  S  s  =  I 

—  —  so.1:  - 

*-    ?    i<  —  _ 
—  —    '  *    V    lJ 

5    I  2< 
c/J  rt  si-'  >. 

■  >.  G  —  ^ 
■/.  u  cd  ..r= 


C   41 

_S  _r 73  S> 


*  >  u 


M  (J  U    p 

—  v  ^ 

—  W  S    C 

bo  41 ,5  2 

.£  en     2 

I-  c  >»  c 

s  o  s  c 


• 


fj 


• 


PAN-PACIFIC  UNION 

PROGRAM  AND  PROCEEDINGS 

First 
Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 


A  Regional  Section  of 

The  Press  Congress  of  the  World 

i 

HONOLULU,  OCTOBER  21,  1921 

Held  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union  and  called  by 
Dr.  Walter  Williams,  President  of 
the  Press  Congress  of  the  World. 


EXECUTIVE  COMMITTEE 


Alexander  Hume  Ford     .     Pan-Pacific  Chairman 
Guy  Innes      ....      Australia,  Vice-Chairman 

V.  S.  McClatchy United  States 

K.    Sugimura        Japan 

Jabin    Hsu        China 

Mark  Cohen New   Zealand 

V  R.  Beteta Latin  America 

C.    O.    Mayrand Canada 

Hin    Wang  China 

Riley  H.  Allen Hawaii 

Gregorio    Nieva  Philippines 

T.    Petrie Hongkong 

H.  Heung-Wo  Cynn Korea 

Dr.   Frank  F.   Bunker Secretary 

EXECUTIVE  COMMITTEE 

of 

Permanent  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 

Body 

Elected,  October  21,   1921 

Lorrin  A.  Thurston President 

Proprietor  Honolulu  Advertiser. 
Dr.  Frank   F.   Bunker Secretary 

Executive  Secretary  Pan-Pacific  Union. 

Y.  Soga     ....      Editor  Nippu  Jiji,  Honolulu 


"36**5 


.    .-   ••    :•:  :*•  ';  •*:  :":  :0  ?'*• 
:  •  •:    :•  /:  ..'•  "    ' 

2  FIRST  PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS  CONFERENCE. 

THE  PAN-PACIFIC  UNION 

U  ,ui  organization  representing  Governments  of  Pacific  lands,  with  which  are 
affiliated  Chambers  of  Commerce  and  kindred  bodies,  working  for  the  advance- 
ment oi  Pacific  States  and  Communities,  and  for  a  greater  co-operation  among 
and  between  the  people  of  all  races  in  Pacific  lands.  Its  central  office  is  in 
Honolulu  at  the  ocean  crossroads. 

The  Pan-Pacific  Union  is  incorporated  with  an  International  Board  of 
Trustees,  representing  every  race  and  nation  of  the  Pacific. 

The  trustees  may  be  added  to  or  replaced  by  appointed  representatives  #  of 
the  different  countries  co-operating  in  the  Pan-Pacific  Union.  The  following 
are  the  main  objects  set  forth  i.n  the  charter  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union: 

1.  To  call  in  conference  delegates  from  all  Pacific  peoples  for  the  pur- 
pose of  discussing  and  furthering  the  interests  common  to  Pacific  nations. 

2.  To  maintain  in  Hawaii  and  other  Pacific  lands  bureaus  of  information 
and  education  concerning  matters  of  interest  to  the  people  of  the  Pacific,  and  to 
disseminate  to  the  world  information  of  every  kind  of  progress  and  opportunity 
in  Pacific  lands,  and  to  promote  the  comfort  and  interests  of  all  visitors. 

3.  To  aid  and  assist  those  in  all  Pacific  communities  to  better  understand 
each  other,  and  to  work  together  for  the  furtherance  of  the  best  interests  of  the 
land  of  their  adoption,  and,  through  them,  to  spread  abroad  about  the  Pacific 
the  friendly  spirit  of  inter-racial  co-operation. 

4.  To  assist  and  to  aid  the  different  races  in  lands  of  the  Pacific  to  co- 
operate in  local  fairs,  to  raise  produce,  and  to  create  home  manufactured  goods. 

5.  To  own  real  estate,  erect  buildings  needed  for  housing  exhibits ;  pro- 
vided and  maintained  by  the  respective  local  committees. 

6.  To  maintain  a  Pan- Pacific  Commercial  Museum,  and  Art  Gallery. 

7.  To  create  dioramas,  gather  exhibits,  books  and  other  Pan-Pacific 
material  of  educational  or  instructive  value. 

8.  To  promote  and  conduct  a  Pan-Pacific  Exposition  of  the  handicrafts  of 
the  Pacific  peoples,  of  their  works  of  art,  and  scenic  dioramas  of  the  most 
beautiful  bits  of  Pacific  lands,  or  illustrating  great  Pacific  industries. 

9.  To  establish  and  maintain  a  permanent  college  and  "clearing  house"  of 
information  (printed  and  otherwise)  concerning  the  lands,  commerce,  peoples, 
and  trade  opportunities  in  countries  of  the  Pacific,  creating  libraries  of  commer- 
cial knowledge,  and  training  men  in  this  commercial  knowledge  of  Pacific  lands. 

10.  To  secure  the  co-operation  and  support  of  Federal  and  State  govern- 
ments, chambers  of  commerce,  city  governments,  and  of  individuals. 

11.  To  enlist  for  this  work  of  publicity  in  behalf  of  Alaska,  the  Territory 
of  Hawaii,  and  the  Philippines,  Federal  aid  and  financial  support,  as  well  as 
similar  co-operation  and  support  from  all  Pacific  governments. 

12.  To  bring  all  nations  and  peoples  about  the  Pacific  Ocean  into  closer 
friendly  and  commercial  contact  and  relationship. 

TRUSTEES 

President   Hon.  Wallace   K.   Farrington,  Governor  of  Hawaii 

Vice-Presidents:  Hon.  Walter  F.  Frear,  William  R.  Castle 

F.  C.  Atherton  Chung  K.  Ai 

rr.usurer    F.   E.  Blake 

Mayor  of  Honolulu J.  H.  Wilson 

G    I ' .  I  H-nison  G.  N.  Wilcox  J.  M.  Young  Dr.  W.  T.  Brigham 

Vaughan   MacCaughey    John  Guild  John  C.  Lane  F.  J.  Lowrey 

Dr.  A.  F.  Jackson  Dr.  Iga  Mori  F.  F.  Baldwin  R.H.Trent 

K.  Yamamoto  Kit-hard  A.  Cooke  D.H.Hitchcock 

Director  Alexander  Hume  Ford 

Executive  Secretary  Dr.  Frank  F.  Bunker 

and  Consuls  in  Honolulu  from  Pacific  Countries 


I     > ' 


tin 

To 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


CONTENTS 

Page 

Frontispiece  

The  Pan-Pacific  Organization  2 

Officers  Pan-Pacific  Day  4 

Delegates  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 5 

Program / 

Sketch  of  program  and  procedure 9 

Report  of  committee  on  resolutions — -  32 

Resolution  of  thanks  to  news  agencies —  41 

The  Executive  Committee 42 


Alphabetical  Index  of  Addresses 


ALLEN,  RILEY  H.  Seconding  nomination 
president.  42;  Interchange  of  News  in 
Pacific,  49. 

BETETA,  V.  R.  The  Need  in  Latin  Ameri- 
can Countries,  79. 

BUNKER,  FRANK  F.  The  Pan-Pacific  Con- 
gress, 84. 

COHEN,  HON.  MARK.  The  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Conference.  20;  Discussion,  Reso- 
lution, No.  2,  37. 

DAVIDSON,  J.  E.  Journalism  in  Australia, 
71. 

FARRINGTON,  HON.  WALLACE  R.  The 
Meaning  of  Pan-Pacific  Union,  11. 

FORD,  ALEXANDER  HUME.  Why  a  Per- 
manent Pan-Pacific  Conference  Body,  17; 
Closing  Words,  94;  Introduction  of  M. 
Zumoto,   Chairman   Morning   Session,   16. 

HSU,  JABIN.  A  Message  From  Chinese 
Press,  65. 

INNES,  GUY.  A  Pacific  Understanding,  26; 
Nominating  Secretary,  42. 

KESSEL,  HON.  G.  H.  Greetings  from  Aus- 
tralia, 14. 

KIM,  D.  S.     The  Newspaper  in  Korea,  69. 

LAWSON,  COL.  Discussion,  Resolution, 
No.  2,  39. 


MAYRAND,  OSWALD.  The  Pan-Pacific 
Union  and  the  Canadian  Press,  60. 

McCLATCHY,  V.  S.  Reply  to  Introduction 
Secretary  Morning  Session,  16;  Discus- 
sion, Resolution  No.  2,  39;  Nomination 
President,  42;  Trans-Pacific  News  Com- 
munication,  46. 

NIEVA,   GREGORIO.     The  New  Pacific,   30. 

PETRI E,  T.  Nominating  Member  Executive 
Committee,  43;  Pan-Pacific  Cable  News 
Service,  44. 

SOGA,  Y.     Japanese  Press  in  Hawaii,  62. 

STEAD,  HENRY.  The  Press  and  Peace  in 
the  Pacific,   23. 

THURSTON,  LORRIN  A.  Report  Commit- 
tee on  Resolutions,  32;  Discussion  Reso- 
lution No.  2,  38;  Field  Service  for  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference,   53. 

TONG,  HOLLINGTON  K.  Open  Diplomacy, 
Hope  of  Pacific  Press,  57. 

WANG,  K.  P.  Getting  News  In  and  Out  of 
China,  88. 

WEN,  HON.  S.  T.     Greetings  from  China,  12. 

WILLIAMS,  DEAN  WALTER.  The  Pan- 
Pacific  Conference,  13;  A  Pan-Pacific 
School   of    Journalism,    82. 

YAMAGATA,  I.     Journalism  in  Korea,  67. 

ZUMOTO,  M.  Reply  to  Introduction  as 
Chairman   Morning   Session,   16. 


FIRST  PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS  CONFERENCE. 

PAN-PACIFIC  DAY— PROGRAM 

Friday,  October  21,  1921 


ram. 
m. 


Honorary  Chairman,   Dean  Walter  Will, an,..    President 
IVess  Congress  of  the  World. 

Alexander   Hume   Ford,  Chairman  Conference  Prog 
Mrs.  F.  M.  Swanzy,  Chairman  Entertainment    Progra 
Dr.  Frank  F.  Bunker,  Secretary  of  the  Conference. 

M  Zumoto,  Chairman  Morning  Session. 
A.  S.  McClatchy,  Secretary  Morning  Session. 
Hollington   K.   Tong,   Chairman  Afternoon  Session 
Hon.  Mark  Cohen.  Secretary  Afternoon   Session. 


Resolutions   Committee 

L.  A.   Thurston Hawaii 

Guy  II.  Innes Australasia 

T-  M.  Wang china 

1 .   Petrie Hongkong 

Gregorio  Nieva  Philippines 

•Mrs.   M.    Evans British   Columbia 

Dr.  Frank  F.  (Junker America 

T.  Sugimura japan 

V.  R.  Beteta Latin  America 


Agenda   Committee  Recommendations  Committee 

Vas   M°cCb  ,  ,        NT-  rfand  Guy  H"  Innes Australia 

"  :         '     lEtCh5  (  ahf0rnia  Mn  Snell Associated  Press 

JMZv^oU     China  HoIH^to"  K-  Tong China 

R.'  H.  AllenlZ Hawaii  l'  ^ric U™Zk™g 

r    S   Mnvr-.nl  -Hawaii  Y.  Soga  Hawaii-Japan 

L-  b"  Ma>r<i"(l Canada  Hin  Wone  ru 

H    A    Davip  n  ,-  vvunS  China 

-Australia  H.  W.  Patten Washington  State 


FIRST  PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS  CONFERENCE.  5 

Delegates  Invited  to  Participate  in 

THE   FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS   CONFERENCE 

As  a  Regional  Section  of  the 

PRESS   CONGRESS   OF    THE   WORLD 

All  of  the  delegates  to  the  Press  Congress  of  the  world  are  expected  to 
attend  this  Regional  Section,  and  to  take  part  in  the  general  discussions.  Only 
the  delegates  from  Pacific  lands,  however,  will  be  expected  to  vote  at  the 
business   session. 

Hon.  Wallace  R.  Farrington,  Governor  of  Hawaii,  President  of  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Union  and  representing  the  President  of  the  United  States  at  the 
conference. 

Dean  Walter  Williams,  President  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the  World. 

Henry    Stead,   editor   of   "Stead's    Review,"   Melbourne,    Australia. 

Hollington  K.  Tong,  "Millard's  Review,"  Shanghai,  and  "The  North  China 
Star,"  Tientsin. 

M.  Zumoto,  editor  "Herald  of  Asia,"  Tokyo,  Japan. 

Hon.  Mark  Cohen,  fifty  years  an  editor  in  New  Zealand,  and  now  a  member 
of  the  upper  house  of  parliament. 

Gregorio  Nieva,  editor  "Philippines  Review,"  Manila,  P.  I. 

V.  S.  McClatchy,  editor  "Sacramento  Bee,"  California. 

T.    Petrie,   editor   "South    China   Morning   Post,"    Hongkong. 

I.  Yamagata,  editor  "Seoul  Press,"  Korea. 

Charles  Oswald  Mayrand,  editor  "La  Presse,"  Montreal,  Canada. 

Virgilio   Rodriguez   Beteta,   The   Press   Association   of   Central    America. 

K.  Sugimura,  editor  "Tokio  Asahi." 

Henry  B.   Schwartz,  "The   Far   East." 

W.  Easton,  "Otago  Daily  Times,"  Dunedin,  N.  Z. 

W.    McCullough,    editor    "Thames,"    New    Zealand. 

C.   S.    Smith,   chairman.   New   Zealand   Press   Association. 

Wm.  R.  Kettle,  "Greymouth  Star,"  New  Zealand. 

Sam  B.  Trissel,  editor  "Honolulu  Advertiser." 

John  Snell,  Associated  Press,  Honolulu. 

Dr.  Frank  F.  Bunker,  editor  "J apanese- American  Review." 

Dr.  T.  Harada,  editor.  "Japanese-American  Review." 


6  FIRST  PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS  CONFERENCE. 

Major  H.  W.  Patten,  "Hoaquim,"  Washington  State  Press  Association. 

Riley  H.  Allen,  editor  "Honolulu  Star-Bulletin." 

Lorrin  A.   Thurston,  proprietor   "Honolulu  Advertiser." 

Alexander   Hume   Ford,  editor  "Mid-Pacific  Magazine." 

Y.  Soga,  editor  "Nippu  Jiji,"  Honolulu. 

F.   J.   Cody,   editor   "Posl    Herald,"   Hilo,    Hawaii. 

K.  P.  Wang,  "The  Shun   I'ao."  Shanghai,  China. 

Jabin  Hsu.  Chinese  Newspaper  Association  of  Shanghai,  and   "China   Press." 

T.  M.  Wang,  "Shanghai  Press." 

( ruy  Innes,  associate  editor  "The  Herald,"  Melbourne. 

W.  J.  Kirkup,  "Stead's  Review,"  Melbourne,  Australia. 

H.  A.  Davies,  president  "Australia  Journalists  Association." 

J.     E.    Davidson,    managing    director    "The    Barrier     Miner,"     Broken     Hill, 
Australia ;   first  president  Australian  Journalists  Association. 

Andrew  Dunn,  Queensland  Press  Association,  Australia. 

f.   II.  Kessell,  Brisbane   Press  Association,   Australia. 

A.   L.   Wilson,   proprietor   "Auckland   Morning   Herald,"    New    Zeland. 

H.  J.  Clark,  Santa  Monica,  California. 

S.  E.  DeRacken,  editor  "Outlook,"  California. 

Harry  Isles,  "Southwest  Builder  and  Contractor,"  Los  Angeles,  California. 

Frank  Kearn,  "Worth  While  Magazine,"  Los  Angeles,  California. 

Miss  Lillian  McKeown,  "Sun  and  Telegram,"  San  Bernardino,  California. 

Mrs.  Anna  Blake  Mezquida,  "Examiner,"  San  Francisco,  California. 

F.  U.  Johnson,  "Hermoso  Daily  Press,"  California. 

Mi^s  Ada  M.   Temple,    "The   Republican,"   Mountain    Home,    Idaho. 

Miss  Margaret    Evans,   Victoria,   B.   C. 

Miss  W.  V.  Johnston,  "Manhatten  Leach  News,"  California. 

Mrs.  Georgina   S.  Townsend,    President   of  the   Southern   California  Woman's 
Press  Club,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

Kim  Dong-Sung,  "Dona — a  Daily,"  Seoul,  Korea. 

Min  Wang,  Canton  Press  Association,  China. 

P.   Y.  Chien,  "Social  Welfare  Daily,"  Tientsin.  China. 

Dan  Logan,  Representing  National  Magazine  and  Hawaiian   Press. 

Miss  M.   Eugenie    Perry,  Canadian   Women's  Press  Club. 

Howard  Case,  Publicity  Agent   Press  Congress  of  the  World. 

Will  Sabin,  Official  Reporter  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference. 

Henry  Chung,  "New  Korea,"  San  Francisco,  California. 


FIRST  PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS  CONFERENCE. 

Program  of  the  First  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 
Honolulu,  October  21,  1921 


Morning  Session  at  9  A.  M. 

1.  Reception  on  the  steps  of  the  Capitol  to  the  Delegates  to  the  First  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference  by  the  Governor  of  Hawaii,  the  Trustees  of  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union,  the  General  of  the  Army  and  the  Admiral  of  the  Navy. 

2.  Pageant  and  presentation  of  the  flags  of  the  fifty  states  and  territories  of 
the  United  States  by  the  sons  and  daughters  of  the  various  states,  followed 
by  the  presentation  of  the  flags  of  Pacific  Nations  by  their  sons  and 
daughters  in  Hawaii. 

Adjournment  to  the  Throne  Room. 

3.  Address  of  welcome  to  the  delegates  by  Hon.  Wallace  R.  Farrington, 
Governor  of  Hawaii  and  President  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union. 

4.  The  Conference  is  turned  over  to  the  delegates  by  Dean  Walter  Williams. 
President  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the  World. 

5.  Address  by  Alexander  Hume  Ford,  Director  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union, 
"Why  a  Permanent  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  Body?" 

6.  Paper  from  Henry  Stead,  Editor  "Stead's  Review,"  Melbourne,  Australia, 
"Peace  and  the  Press  of  the  Pacific." 

7.  Paper  by  T.  Petrie,  Editor,  "South  China  Morning  Post,"  Hongkong, 
"Pan-Pacific  Cable  News  Service." 

8.  Paper  by  Hollington  K.  Tong,  "Millard's  Review,"  Shanghai,  and  "North 
China  Star,"  Tientsin. 

"Open  Diplomacy,  the  Hope  of  the  Pacific  Press." 

9.  Paper  by  Riley  H.  Allen,  Editor,  "Star-Bulletin,"  Honolulu,  Hawaii. 
"The  Inter-communication  Problems  of  the  Pacific." 

10.  Paper  by   Gregorio   Nieva,   Editor,   "Philippines   Review,"    Manila,    P.    I. 
"A  Pacific  Understanding." 

11.  Paper  by  Guy  Innes,  Associate  Editor,  "The  Herald,"  Melbourne,  Austra- 
"The  New  Pacific." 

lia. 

12.  Paper  by  V.  S.  McClatchy,  Editor,  "Sacramento  Bee,"  California  Direc- 
tor Associated  Press. 

"World  News  Service  to  Pacific  Lands." 

13.  Paper  by  Virgilio  Rodriguez  Beteta,  Press  Association  of  Central  America. 
"The  Press  of  Latin  America." 

14.  Paper  by  Hon.  Mark  Cohen,  fifty  years  editor  in  New  Zealand,  and  mem- 
ber of  the  upper  house  of  Parliament. 

"The  New  Zealand  Press  of  the  Pacific  World." 

15.  Paper  by  Matsadu  Zumoto,  Editor,  "Herald  of  Asia,"  Tokyo,  Japan. 
"Problems  of  Japanese  Journalism." 

16.  General  Discussion. 
Recess. 


r 


S  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

(  )n  adjournment  ;it  noon  the  delegates  will  be  entertained  by  Trustees  of 
the  Pan-Pacific  Union  and  their  friends  at  luncheon,  who  will  escort  them  back 
to  the  Executive  building. 

Afternoon  Session  at  2  P.  M. 

In  the  throne  room  of  the  Capitol  building. 

1.  Paper  by  Dean  Walter  Williams,  president  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World. 

"The  Need  of  a  Pan-Pacific  School  of  Journalism." 

2.  Paper  by    Lorrin    A.    Thurston,   editor,   "Honolulu    Advertiser." 
"Journalism  at  the  Cross  Roads  of  the   Pacific." 

3.  Paper    by     Charles    Oswald     Mayrand,     editor.     "La     Presse,"     Montreal, 
Canada. 

"Canadian  Journalism." 

4.  Paper  by   Herbert   Arthur    Davies,   president    Australian  Journalists   Asso- 
ciation. 

"Journalists   Union    in    Australasia." 

5.  Paper  by   I.   Yamagata,  editor,  "Seoul   Press." 
"Journalism  in  Korea." 

6.  Paper  by  Major  H.  W.  Patten,  Washington  State  Press  Association. 
"The  Pacific  Coast  and  the  News  from  Pacific  Lands." 

7.  Paper  by  Jabin   Hsu,   Association  of   Chinese   Newspapers,   Shanghai. 
"Getting  the  News  Into  and  Out  of  China." 

8.  Paper  by  Y.  Soga,  editor  "Nippu  Jiji,"   Honolulu. 
"The  Japanese  Press  in  Hawaii. 

9.  Paper  by   H.    P.   Wang,   "The   Shun   Pao."   Shanghai,   China. 
"A  Message  from  the  Press   of  China." 

10.  Paper  by  Dr.  Frank  F.  Bunker,  secretary  Pan-Pacific  Union,  editor  "Japan- 

\ineriea    Review." 

"How    Hawaii    at    the    Crossroads    Station    May    Serve    the    Press    of    the 
Pacific." 

1 1 .  Discussion. 

Recess  and  adjournment  to  grounds  of  the  Old  Mission. 

The  delegates  will  adjourn  to  the  old  Mission  building,  where  an  afternoon 
tea  will  be  served,  and  an  Hawaiian  entertainment  provided. 
Business  session  at  Mission  Memorial  Hall. 
Adoption  of  resolutions  and  business  session  during  the  dinner  hour. 

Adjournment 

At  the  close  ot  thr  business  session  an  entertainment,  prepared  l>v  the 
different  Pacific  races  in  Hawaii,  will  be  presented.  In  the  Mission  Memorial 
hall  there  will  be  an  exhibit  of  Latin-American  and  Pan-American  newspapers 
and  magazines.  In  the  Library  of  Hawaii  building  a  free  exhibit  of  moving 
pictures  of  Pacific  lands.     The  buildings  all  practically  adjoin  one  another. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Sketch  of  Program  and   Procedure 


At  nine  o'clock  on  the  morning  of 
(  )ctober  21,  1921,  Governor  of  Hawaii, 
as  the  President  of  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union,  the  General  of  the  Army,  and 
the  Admiral  of  the  Navy,  together  with 
the  trustees  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union, 
gathered  on  the  steps  of  the  Capitol 
building  to  receive  the  delegates  to  the 
first  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference,  and 
with  them  to  review  the  pageant  of  the 
states  and  countries  of  the  Pacific,  com- 
prising children  of  each  state  and  coun- 
try who  presented  the  flag  of  each. 

There  were  fifty  groups  of  children 
from  the  States  and  Territories  of  the 
United  States,  each  marching  behind 
the  state  flag,  each  in  the  colors  and 
bearing  the  floral  emblem  of  his  state. 
These  were  led  by  a  detachment  from 
the  Army  carrying  the  national  colors. 

The  groups  from  Pacific  lands  in 
their  national  dress  were  headed  by  a 
detachment  from  the  United  States 
Navy,  carrying  the  colors,  and  con- 
cluding with  the  Filipino  section  escort- 
ing an  historic  silken  flag  of  the 
Philippines  which  was  presented  to 
( Governor  Farrington  as  head  of  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union. 

At  the  conclusion  of  the  pageant, 
Governor  Farrington  led  the  way  into 
the  throne  room  of  the  old  Iolani 
Palace  of  the  ancient  Hawaiian  mon- 
archy, now  the  Executive  Building  of 
the   Territory.  * 

After  a  brief  address  of  welcome, 
( rovernor  Farrington  introduced  a  dis- 
tinguished visitor,  Hon.  S.  T.  Wen, 
Commissioner  of  Foreign  Affairs,  Nan- 
king, China,  who  is  on  his  way  to  the 
Washington  conference  on  limitation  of 
armament. 


Governor  Farrington  then  turned  the 
meeting  over  to  the  chairman  of  the 
Executive  Committee  having  the  pro- 
gram for  the  day  in  hand,  Mr.  Alexan- 
der Hume   Ford. 

After  a  brief  address,  Mr.  Ford  called 
upon  Mr.  M.  Zumoto  of  Japan  to  pre- 
side at  the  morning  session  and  Mr. 
Hollington  K.  Tong  of  China  to  pre- 
side at  the  afternoon  session. 

Upon  the  recommendation  of  the 
Agenda  Committee,  the  conference 
entered  at  once  upon  the  chief  busi- 
ness of  the  day,  the  adoption  of  a  plan 
of  organization  and  the  consideration 
and  adoption  of  resolutions  proposed. 
Upon  the  completion  of  this  business 
the  remaining  time  was  given  over  to 
the  presentation  of  addresses. 

At   the   Mission   Buildings 

Upon  the  adjournment  of  the  sessions 
of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  at 
4  p.  m.,  a  number  of  Hawaiian  Girl 
Scouts  met  the  delegates  in  the  balcony 
of  the  Executive  Building  and  escorted 
them  across  the  palace  grounds  to  the 
old  Mission  buildings  where  afternoon 
tea  was  served  and  an  interesting  Ha- 
waiian  entertainment    staged. 

In  this  group  of  buildings  is  the  old 
Kawaiahau  Church,  built  in  the  early 
misionary  days  of  blocks  of  coral 
brought  from  the  reef  on  the  shoulders 
of  the  native  Hawaiian  builders.  In 
the  surrounding  graveyard  early  mis- 
sionaries and  Hawaiian  kings  lie  side  by 
side.  Adjoining  is  the  group  of  coral 
mission  buildings  erected  a  hundred  and 
one  years  ago,  and  the  first  frame  house 
erected  in  Hawaii,  brought  around  Cape 
Horn  in  sailing  vessels  from  Boston. 
In  these  houses  the  parents  and  grand- 


10 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


parents  of  many  of  those  who  are  now 
leaders  in  I  [awaii  were  born. 

In  one  of  the  buildings,  in  (  Ictober, 
1821,  a  century  ago,  was  housed  the 
first  printing  press  west  of  the  Rockies. 
A  reproduction  of  this  press  was  made 
from  the  original  now  in  the  Museum 
of  the  Commercial  Club  in  Portland, 
ron,  and  descendants  of  Hawaiian 
chiefs  in  their  ancient  feather  robes  re- 
enacted  in  Hawaii  the  tableau  of  the 
printing  of  the  first  leaflets  from  a  real 
printing    press    in    Pacific    lands. 

Across  the  street  in  the  Mission 
Memorial  building,  erected  to  com- 
ni'-morate  the  centenary  of  the  landing 
of  the  missionaries  in  Hawaii,  was  dis- 
played  an  exhibit  of  the  newspapers 
and  magazines  from  Pacific  lamb,  espe- 
cially thosC  from  Latin  America.  In 
the  Public  Library  building  nearby  was 
exhibited  motion  films  depicting  life  in 
the  lands  about  the    Pacific. 

The  activities  of  Pan-Pacific  Da) 
drew  to  a  close  at  dusk,  but  the  Execu- 
tive Committee,  elected  for  that  pur- 
pose by  the  1 'an- Pacific  Press  Confer- 
ence, will  now  take  up  with  the  Pan 
Pacific  Union  the  work  of  keeping  alive. 
active,  and  ever  progressing,  the  plans 
for  a  permanent  organized  bod)  oi  jour- 
nalist- from  Pacific  lands  who  will  meet 
in  conference  from  time  to  time  to 
establish  closer  cooperative  methods  in 
the  gathering  of  news  and  its  dissemi- 
nation among  the  countries  of  the  Pa 
cific  and  of  the  world,  to  the  end  that 
the  peoples  of  the  greal  ocean  may 
know  and  trUSl  each  other  more  and 
more  reaching  finally  a  complete  and 
thorough    understanding. 


Active  Work  Already  Begun 

Already,  as  this  volume  of  proceed- 
ies  to  press,  President  Thurston 
has  begun  constructive  work  by  inviting 
tin'  newly  elected  executive  committee 
of  the  Pan-Pacific  Congress  to  meet 
with  Dean  Williams,  President  of  the 
World's  Press  Congress,;  Alexander 
Hume  Ford,  Director  of  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union,  and  a  number  of  the  representa- 
tive delegates  from  Pan-Pacific  coun- 
tries. In  this  initial  meeting  it  was 
agreed  that  the  first  and  most  important 
step  for  the  Pan- Pacific  Press  Congress 
to  undertake  was  that  of  making  a  care- 
ful stud)  of  the  facts  with  respect  to 
the  securing  and  transmission  of  news 
in  the  several  countries  in  the  Pacific 
region,  ami  to  that  end  it  was  recom- 
mended that  the  Director  and  Executive 
Secretary  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  be 
detailed  to  make  this  investigation  as 
soon  as  practicable  and  compile  the 
facts.  It  was  further  generally  agreed 
that  after  the  facts  had  been  obtained, 
that  the  organization  would  then  be  in 
a  position  intelligently  to  determine 
what  practical  steps  should  be  taken  to 
secure  unobstructed  channels  of  com- 
munication among  the  several  Pacific 
countries. 

Inasmuch  as  the  Director  of  the  Pan- 
Paeilic  I'nion  and  a  quorum  of  the 
trustees  of  the  Union  will  be  in  Wash- 
ington during  the  Disarmament  confer- 
ence, il  was  suggested  that  an  effort  be 
made  to  have  a  meeting  of  journalists 
held  at  that  point  for  the  further  dis- 
cussion  of  matters  of  particular  interest 
in  the  field  of   Pacific  journalism. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


11 


The   Meaning  of   the   Pan-Pacific   Union 


Hon.   Wallace  R.  Farrington 

Governor  of  Hawaii 


It  is  my  privilege  to  call  you  to  order 
this  morning  in  the  capacity  of  Presi- 
dent of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union. 

I  think  that  you  have  had  a  demon- 
stration this  morning,  on  the  front  steps 
of  the  Capitol,  of  what  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union  means,  and  you  had  an  expres- 
sion there  of  its  mission  in  this  part 
of  the  world.  People  have  asked  some- 
times "What  is  the  Pan-Pacific  Union?" 
The  answer  is  found  in  the  union  of 
nationalities— races — on  this  ocean  on, 
one  is  pleased  to  think,  somewhat  simi- 
lar lines  as  the  great  Union  of  States 
to  which  we  belong.  Sometimes  people 
ask  how  it  is  possible  to  maintain  inde- 
pendence while  in  a  union  which  main- 
tains a  reasonable  degree  of  equality 
among  its  members.  To  one  who  has 
been  born  and  brought  up  in  the  great 
union  of  48  empires  which  marched  be- 
fore you  this  morning,  that  does  not 
seem  difficult.  We  here  at  this  cross- 
roads of  the  Pacific  have  not  found  it 
difficult  to  assemble  the  people  of  every 
racial  group  and  of  every  nation  on 
friendly  terms.  The  Pan-Pacific  Union 
is  an  agent  for  a  better  understanding 
in  this  part  of  the  world,  and  we  feel 
that  by  establishing  friendship  in  the 
area  of  our  activities,  we  shall  help 
spread  that  spirit  abroad  throughout 
the   world   more   rapidly. 


We  are  pleased  to  think  of  Hawaii 
as  the  friendly  outpost  of  a  friendly 
nation,  and  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  finds 
here  a  medium  for  its  activities  which 
is  entirely  friendly,  and  thus  far  in  its 
work  it  has  found  that  the  friendly  at- 
mosphere which  it  endeavors  to  create 
has  been  a  very  favorable  medium  in 
which  to  discuss  the  problems  that  are 
of  mutual  interest.  I  have  come  to  dis- 
like the  word  "problem,"  because  that 
indicates  difficulties.  We  can  discuss 
also  a  problem  indicating  difference  of 
opinion.  We  can  also  discuss  the 
pleasantries  of  life.  We  can  find 
pleasant  things  on  which  we  can  go  for- 
ward on  a  common  plan. 

It  is  quite  natural  that  the  closing 
hours  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World  should  devote  a  portion  of  its 
time  especially  to  the  Pan-Pacific  sec- 
tion. People  from  all  parts  of  the 
world  come  to  us  here,  and  they  some- 
times drop  in  on  us  unexpectedly  and 
find  here,  as  you  delegates  have  found, 
a   fair   haven. 

We  are  especially  honored  this  morn- 
ing in  having  with  us  an  unexpected  and 
very  welcome  guest  in  the  person  of 
Hon.  S.  T.  Wen,  Commissioner  of  For- 
eign Affairs,  from  Nanking,  who  is  on  his 
way  to  the  great  meeting  of  nations  in 
Washington.  I  am  pleased  to  present  to 
you,  Hon.  S.  T.  Wen. 


12 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Greetings    from   China 


Hon.  S.  T.  Wen, 

Commissioner  of  Foreign  Affairs 

Nanking,  China. 


Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  It  is  a  great 
pleasure  for  me  to  be  invited  b)  the  <  rt)V- 
ernor  to  address  you.  It  is  also  a  distinct 
pleasure  to  inert  im  old  friend,  Mr.  Ford, 
who  started  the  first  Pan-Pacific  Union 
in  Changhai,  an  organization  oi  which  1 
feel  very  much  honored  to  he  a  member. 
I  was  very  much  interested  this  morn- 
ing, when  1  observed  the  great  ceremony 
which  you  held,  and  the  wonderful 
demonstration  in  which  so  many  p?onle 
.if  Mich  different  races  met  together  and 
worked  together  like  one  family — like 
brothers.  It  was  really  wonderful  and 
has  impressed  me  very  much  indeed. 

1  remember  when  Mr.  Ford  brought 
a  Congressional  part)  to  visit  China  last 
\«ar.  Now  we  are  going  to  America 
and  will  have  an  opportunity  to  meet  all 
our  friends  in  America.  We  have  had 
a  thorough  talk  with  them.  We  under- 
stand each  other.  It  was  then  that  I 
began  to  realize  that  if  people  would 
take  more  pains  t(1  exchange  their  views 
and  have  a  clear  understanding  as  to 
their  positions  there  would  be  more 
good  fellowship.  I  think  it  is  due  to 
the  great  effort  of  Mr.  Ford  who 
broughl  a  large  party  to  China,  thai 
we    are    now     taking    a    large    party    to 


America — not  quite  as  large  as  the  Con-; 
gressional  part)-  of  last  year.  We  be- 
gan  to  increase  our  correspondents  and 
began  to  learn  more,  and  so  we  could 
give  more  information  to  our  people  at 
home.  As  ni)-  boat  is  going  to  leave 
this  noon,  my  time  is  very  short.  ,  It 
simply  gives  me  the  opportunity  to  ex- 
press our  great  sympathy  and  also  con- 
vey our  congratulations  for  the  com- 
plete and  personal  success  of  your  great 
Congress.  I  meet  many  different  people 
in  a  fairyland  like  Hawaii  here,  and  I 
take  the  opportunity  to  say  goodbye  to 
them  and  to  all  my  friends  who  are 
present   today.     (Applause.) 

Governor  Fakkington:  It  now  be- 
comes my  pleasant  duty  to  turn  this  con- 
ference over  to  the  wheel  horse  of  the  or- 
ganization, Mr.  Alexander  Hume  Ford. 

Alexander  Hume  Ford:  Kindred 
Spirits:  It  is  a  great  pleasure  to  follow 
the  Governor  who  has  succeeded  on  this 
throne  our  kings  of  the  past.  and.  as 
we  are  getting  right  down  to  business, 
I  am  going  to  call  on  our  Honorary 
President  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Tress  Con- 
gress and  the  Perpetual  and  Life  Presi- 
dent of  the  Tress  Congress  of  the 
World.  Mean  Williams.     (Applause.) 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


13 


The   Pan-Pacific   Conference 


Dean     Walter    Williams, 
President  Press  Congress  of  the  World 


The  duty  that  lias  been  asked  of  me  is 
a  very  pleasant  one,  and  one  that  I  can 
pefonn  in  a  very  brief  and  simple  way. 
It  is  to  express  the  interest  of  the  parent 
in  its  child.  It  is  to  speak  on  behalf  of 
the  Press  Congress  of  the  World  a  word 
of  appreciation  to  the  Pan-Pacific  Union 
for  permitting  the  organization  here  in 
beautiful  Honolulu  of  the  first  original 
section  of  the  departmental  group  of 
the  World's  Press  Congress — viz,  a 
Pan-Pacific   Press   Conference. 

We  have  witnessed  this  morning  a 
glowing  ceremonial,  mingling  the 
strength,  beauty,  grace  and  harmony 
that  exist  among  Pan-Pacific  people, 
and  the  object  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union, 
I  think,  and  certainly  the  object  of  the 
Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  is  to  per- 
mit each  of  these  peoples  and  nationali- 
ties to  grow  to  the  fullest  extent  of 
their  own  individual  grace  and  beauty 
and  power  without  interfering  in  any 
way  with  the  growth  and  the  beauty 
and  the  grace  and  the  power  of  the 
other  nations  and  peoples  represented  in 
the  Pan-Pacific  lands.  Jut  as  the  indi- 
viduals in  a  community  are  encouraged 
to  make  the  most  of  themselves,  so 
long  as  the  making  of  the  most  of 
themselves  permits  others  to  make  the 
most  of  themselves,  so  each  community 
reaches   its   highest   results. 

Democracy  Defined 

We  have  heard  much  about  democ- 
racy in  these  last  few  years.  The  finest 
definition  of  a  democracy  that  I  know 
was  given  by  a  Frenchman,  Pasteur,  a 
tanner's  son.  (I  have  some  sympathy 
with  the  son  of  a  tanner.)     He  said  that 


democracy  meant  to  him,  giving  or  per- 
mitting each  individual  to  have  the  op- 
portunity of  putting  forth  his  maximum 
effort.  And  democracy  in  the  best 
sense,  whatever  governmental  system  it 
may  grow  up  under,  seeks  to  give  to 
each  race  and  nationality  and  individual, 
in  its  own  way,  and  without  interference 
from  others,  and  not  interfering  with 
others,  an  opportunity  for  such  self- 
expression,  such  individual  growth,  as 
will  best  serve  not  only  itself  but  all 
the  world  as  well. 

There  is  no  room  for  conflict  if  pro- 
gress is  to  be  carried  forward  to  its  ut- 
most. The  only  conflict  and  clash 
should  be  the  clash  and  conflict  of  opin- 
ions and  ideas  seeking  to  promote  that 
which  is  best  for  all.  We  are  not  the 
less  servants  of  our  national  ambitions 
if  we  at  the  same  time  recognize  that 
others  have  national  ambitions  equally 
worthy  of  consideration  as  our  own, 
and  as  long  as  our  national  ambitions 
clash  not  with  those  of  other  nations 
and  people  they  are  properly  to  be  ad- 
vanced and  promoted  in  every  way,  in 
every  legitimate  way,  and  now,  Mr. 
Chairman,  appreciating  the  helpfulness 
of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union,  and  thanking 
you  for  this  opportunity  to  say  a  word 
on  behalf  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World,  as  the  father  of  the  new  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference,  the  Press  Con- 
gress of  the  World  gives  to  it  its  bene- 
diction, its  cordial  good  wishes,  but 
also  its  admonition  and  counsel  that  it 
may  do  its  best  work  in  the  best  way 
unto  the  best  end.  ( Prolonged  ap- 
plause.) 


14  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Greetings   from   Australia 


I  [on.   ('..   IT.    Kessel 

Ex-Member     Parliament,      Queensland  ; 

Mayor  of  City  of  Gladstone, 

(  Queensland 

It    affords    a    visitor    from    Australia  When     I    was     coming    across    in    the 

such   a-    I    am,   a   greal    pleasure   to   be  "Ventura,"  there  were  some  Americans 

here  today  to  represent  Australia  at  the  on  board,  and  they  said  in  my  hearing, 

Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference.     My  wife  as     they     were     leaving     Sydney — they 

and    I    have  come  here,  and   Mr.   Dunn  heaved  a  sort  of  sigh,  and  said:     "We 

my   colleague   from  Queensland,   on  be-  are  going  back  to  God's  own  country:" 

half  of  Australia,  to  show  you  our  sym-  And  T  turned  to  them  and  said:     "You 

pathy    with    this    wonderful    institution  are    leaving    I  leaven   to   go   back   to    an 

which  you  have  originated  in  Honolulu,  earthly  Paradise." 

\-    1    look  at   the  map  of  the  world,   I  Now  we  in  Australia — and  here  I  talk 
hardly    think    the    term    I    heard,    the  primarily  to  the  citizens  of  the  United 
Crossroads  of  the  Pacific,  meets  the  sit-  States — we  want  to  know  our  American 
nation — tin-  Centre  of  the  Pacific  would  eousins  better.    I  use  that  term  "cousin" 
In'    better.      Here,    all    nations    and    all  advisedly.      You    know    if    we    were    to 
colors    seem    to    gravitate    and    live    in  take    your    literature    and    your    picture 
harmony,    and    one   coming    from    Aus-  films  as  an  indication  of  what  you  are 
tralia    cannot    but     be    impressed     and  really,  it  would  be  quite  unsafe  for  one 
given    meat    food    for    thought    at    the  to    stand    here,   because    we    are    led    to 
apparently    simple    way    in    which    you  believe  by  the  ornery  rubbish  that  you 
solve   the   race  question.  seml  across  that  every  American  packs 
While    we    have    been    here    in    this  a    gun    or    a    knife.      My    wife    and    I 
wonderfully  beautiful  spot — and  I  think  occasionally    go    to    the    picture    shows, 
the  "Paradise  of  the   Pacific"  is  not  at  and    I   have  got  so  now  that  I  usually 
all    a    misnomer — while    we    have    been  go  to  sleep.     They  are  so  uninteresting 
lure    and    seen   the   wonderful    improve-  and  un-typical  of  your  country.     Since 
ments    that    have    been    made,    the    ap-  we   have   come   across   here,   I   can   say 
parent    harmony   in   which   you   all   live,  with    the    highest    pleasure,    we    could 
it   makes  one  wonder   what   will   be  the  take  you  for  Australians — but  of  course 
outcome  in.  say,  100  or  200  years.  I  do  not  know  how  that  appeals  to  you. 
I  come  from  a  pari  of  Australia  not  Perhaps   you   will  alter  it  a  little,  but 
represented    here    on    the    map    of    Aus-  we    have   come   here   with    open    minds 
tralia.       Mr.    Dunn    and     I     come    from  and    you    have    received    us    with    open 
Queensland.     We  look  on  it  as  the  star  hearts.     I  would  like  to  express  to  the 
state  of  tin-  -tates  of  Australia.     Every-  President    of    the    World's    Press    Con- 
thing  that  can  grow  in  the  world,  prac-  gress.  and  to  your  wonderful  Director, 
ticallv,  grows  in  our  climate.     We  have  Mr.  Alexander  Hume  Ford,  and  through 
a   climate   as   hot    as   you   can   boast   of  them  to  the  people  of  Hawaii,  how  very 
here,   and   as  cold,  almost,  as   England,  much   we  appreciate  the  wonderful   en- 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


15 


tertainment  you  have  given  us.  Nature 
has  been  wonderfully  kind  to  you  and 
you  have  in  many  ways  assisted  nature. 

Hawaii  An  Object  Lesson 

1  would  like  to  say  this,  Mr.  Presi- 
dent, Ladies  and  Gentlemen,  great  as 
is  the  importance  of  a  Congress  such  as 
this,  its  main  object  will  be  missed  if 
those  of  us — the  four  of  us  who  repre- 
sent Australia — do  not  go  back  with  a 
very — shall  I  say — a  very  chastened 
view  of  some  of  our  ideas.  I  must  con- 
fess that  some  views  which  I  hold  very 
dear  have  had  a  rude  shock.  I  will  not 
say  that  they  have  been  put  out  of  their 
position,  but  I  will  go  back  to  Australia 
and  firstly  tell  our  people  the  impres- 
sions I  have  gained  about  our  Amer- 
ican cousins,  because  we  are  close  re- 
lations of  the  United  States,  and  then 
I  shall  tell  them  what  I  think  of  the 
other  nations  of  the  earth.  One — espe- 
cially an  Australian  of  limited  travel — 
and  I  am  ashamed  to  confess  that  with 
the  exception  of  a  visit  to  Africa,  I 
have  not  seen  the  rest  of  the  world — to 
see  how  you  have  solved  the  problem 
impresses  one.  All  I  can  say  is  that 
when  we  talk  of  the  peace  of  the  world, 
Hawaii  is  almost  an  object  lesson.  Our 
meetings  in  the  World  Press  Congress, 
and    this    meeting,    I    hope,    will    be    of 


some  assistance  to  the  meetings  to  be 
held  in  Washington,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  your  President,  within  the  next 
few   weeks. 

Every  nation  of  the  earth,  and  most 
of  them  meet  here  today,  must  feel  that 
we  are  marching  a  step  nearer  to  the 
millenium.  We  look  forward  to  the 
time  when  we  will  no  more  hear  the 
roar  of  cannon,  and  no  more  see  homes 
devastated  by  the  war.  Even  in  Aus- 
tralia many  homes  are  saddened  by  the 
dreadful  results  of  the  war,  and  if  that 
conference  convened  by  your  President 
does  anything  to  remove  from  the 
world  the  frightful  curse  of  war,  then 
he  deserves  to  stand  high  in  the  history 
of  the  world. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen,  Mr.  President : 
On  behalf  of  Australia,  and  shall  I  say 
particularly  on  behalf  of  the  Queen 
State  of  Australia,  I  greet  you.  I  thank 
you  for  the  warm  welcome  you  have 
given  the  Australians,  and  I  go  back — 
my  mind  broader,  my  views  broader, 
and  my  heart  warmer  towards  the  peo- 
ple of  the  United  States  and  the  as- 
sembled peoples  of  the  world,  and  I 
trust  that  our  Conference  will  go  one 
step  towards  making  the  peace  of  the 
world,  of  which  we  all  hope  and  of 
which  we  all  dream,  an  accomplished 
fact.      (Applause.) 


16 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


The   Introduction   of   Mr.    M.    Zumoto,    Presiding   Officer 
Morning  Session,   and   Mr.   V.   S.    McClatchy, 

Secretary 


Alexander  Mi  mi  Ford:  My  friends, 
it  is  going  to  be  my  greal  pleasure  and 
privilege  to  retire  from  the  throne,  and 
turn  it  over  to  one  more  accustomed  to 
seeing  people  reign  than  ]  have  been  in 
my  life.  In  Japan.  I  attended  a  dinner 
given  by  Baron  Shibusawa  and  across 
the  way  ^at  a  gentleman  who  had  a 
larger  goatee  than  mine.  I  spoke  to 
him.  I  found  that  he  was  the  king  of 
the  newspaper  or  press  men  of  Japan. 
It  is  a  greal  pleasure  and  privilege  to 
ask  this  gentleman,  Mr.  Zumoto,  who 
i-  with  us  to  preside  over  the  morning 
session  and  to  take  the  throne.  (Ap- 
plause, i 

M.  Zumoto:  Mr.  Ford,  Ladies  and 
Gentlemen:  I  never  felt  more  happj 
and  proud  than  now.  It  is  indeed  a 
privilege  to  be  elevated  to  the  throne, 
nol  only  of  Hawaii,  which  alone  would 
have  been  honor  enough,  but  of  the 
greal  and  powerful  Kingdom  of  the 
Press  of  the  Pacific.  I  feel  particular 
pleasure  in  taking  part  in  founding,  in 
giving  birth,  to  an  organization  which 
is  destined  to  play  an  ever  increasingly 
important  part  in  the  solution  of  the 
greal  problem  which  mankind  will  have 
n>  attack,  discuss  many  times,  quarrel 
about  sometimes,  -hake  hands  over,  and 
finally  solving  it  in  such  a  happy  wax- 
that  all  nations  will  be  like  mem- 
bers "t"  one  family.  Then  there  will  he 
no  more  necessity  of  harriers,  frontiers, 
customs,  and  all  sorts  of  things  that 
now  divide  one  nation  from  another, 
and  which  is  at  the  base  of  all  these 
dispute-   between  different  people.     Now, 


in  the  solving  of  that  problem  which 
will  take  thousands  and  thousands  of 
years,  the  Tan- Pacific  Press  Conference 
which  is  now  proclaimed,  whose  birth 
we  now  proclaim  before  the  world,  will 
take  a  very  important  and  prominent 
part,  and  therefore  I  consider  it  a 
great  honor  to  have  been  asked  to  take 
this  distinguished  part  in  its  first  func- 
tion. I  now  have  the  honor  of  calling 
on  that  most  respected  delegate  to  the 
World's  Peace  Congress,  Mr.  McClatchy 
to  honor  us  and  favor  me  especially, 
by  acting  as  Honorary  Secretary  during 
the  morning  session.  Mr.  McClatchy 
will  say   a   word.      (.Applause.) 

Y.  S.  McClatchy:  Mr.  Chairman. 
Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  It  is  indeed 
an  honor  to  be  called  upon  by  my 
friend,  Mr.  Zumoto,  to  fill  the  position 
of  Honorary  Secretary  under  his  juris- 
diction. I  would  be  glad  to  do  it  if 
only  for  my  warm  friendship  and  ad- 
miration for  him,  for  I  learned  to  know 
him  in  Japan.  1  have  an  idea,  however, 
that  I  may  serve  a  useful  purpose.  It 
is  usual  in  my  business  to  have  a  horri- 
ble example,  and  if  that  man  Mc- 
Clatchy can  serve  as  a  horrible  example 
of  what  Pan-Pacific  fraternity  will  do 
by  serving  as  a  baton  to  his  warm  friend 
and  occasional  adversary,  Mr.  Zumoto, 
I  have  served  a  good  purpose.  I  am 
certainly  glad  to  bear  testimony  to  the 
efficiency  and  value  of  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union,  in  that  it  has  made  Mr.  Zumoto 
and  I  friends  and  co-workers  in  a  cause 
that  is,  I  hope,  to  be  of  benefit  to  the 
world,     i  Applause.) 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


17 


Why   a   Permanent   Pan-Pacific   Conference   Body 


By  Alexander  Hume  Ford 
Director   Pan-Pacific    Union 


There  is  need,  as  never  before,  that 
the  gatherers  and  disseminators  of 
news  in  Pacific  lands  come  to  a  better 
knowledge  of  each  other  and  each 
others    lands    and   problems. 

The  Australian  journalist  knows  little 
of  Japan,  the  American  journalist  is 
confused  by  the  reams  of  paid  for  press 
propaganda  that  deluges  him  from  the 
Orient,  the  Japanese  press  takes  seri- 
ously the  utterances  of  the  American 
jingo  journalist  and  tries  to  out-jingo 
him.  The  Latin-American  press  is 
fairly  well  served  so  far  as  her  north- 
ern neighbor  is  concerned,  but  little  in 
other  Pacific  lands  is  known  concern- 
ing the  affairs  of  the  great  South  Amer- 
ican   continent. 

The  result  of  all  this  neglect  of 
understanding  is  that  Pacific  lands  are 
steering  straight  for  the  shoals  of 
chronic  misunderstanding  and  worse. 
Unfortunately  the  great  news  distribut 
ing  bodies  of  Europe  and  America  play 
an  influential  part  in  the  keeping  up 
of  Pan-Pacific  misunderstanding.  They 
control,  largely,  the  dissemination  of 
world  news  to  and  between  Pacific- 
lands,  and  because  of  their  contracts, 
entered  into  long  ago,  when  news  dis- 
semination methods  depended  on  now 
antiquated  methods  make  it  practically 
impossible  for  the  press  of  the  Pacific 
to  secure  cheap  and  abundant  news 
service  to  which  the  invention  of  the 
wireless   entitles   it. 

To  illustrate,  the  delegates  from 
Australasia  to  this  Conference,  up  to 
the  day  before  their  arrival  in  Hono- 
lulu,   could    send    wireless    messages    to 


Australia  and  New  Zealand  for  four- 
teen cents  a  word ;  the  moment  they 
landed,  however,  they  were  shut  off 
from  wireless  communication  with 
Australia  and  must  resort  to  cable 
rates  at  83c  a  word.  Surely  Australia 
and  New  Zealand  should  be  urged  by 
this  Conference  to  find  immediately 
some  means  of  opening  their  wireless 
stations  to  the  reception  of  press  and 
commercial  messages  from  Pacific 
lands,  at  least. 

I  learned  when  in  Japan,  and  from  a 
director  of  the  Associated  Press,  that 
owring  to  a  contract  between  American 
Associated  Press  and  British  Reuter 
that  world  news  to  Japan  must  go  only 
through  Reuters.  Java  has  asked  that 
Honolulu  be  made  a  "drop"  station  and 
that  a  man  be  stationed  here  to  select 
from  the  "drop"  service  such  news  as 
each  Pacific  country  may  desire  and 
forward   it   by  wireless. 

Premier  Massey  of  New  Zealand  in- 
formed me  the  other  day  that  it  may 
be  years  before  the  round  the  world 
British  system  of  wireless  stations  is 
put  in  operation.  One  of  these  is  to 
be  located  at  Auckland  and  the  pre- 
mier hopes  then  that  we  of  other  parts 
of  the  Pacific,  not  colored  in  red,  may 
be  permitted  to  send  wireless  press 
messages  to  Pacific  British  possessions. 

Who  knows  what  may  happen  in 
the  Pacific  during  the  next  few  years 
before  us  if  the  press  of  the  Pacific 
does  not  arise  to  its.  great  duty  and 
by  truthful  reporting  dispel  some  of  the 
misunderstandings  that  are  arising  be- 
cause of  the  fact  that  the  press  of  the 


18 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Pacific  is  not  educating  the  people  con- 
cerning each  others  affairs. 

Tributary  to  the  shores  of  the  Pa- 
cific lives  more  than  halt"  the  population 
of  the  globe.     The  Pacific  Ocean  is  the 

future  theatre  of  the  commerce  of  the 
world.  Here  in  the  Pacific  meet  the 
oldest  and  the  newest  civilizations. 
From  now  on  it  is  the  Pacific  lands 
that  must  feed  the  world.  Lack  o!  co- 
operation and  understanding  among  Pa- 
cific peoples  would  prove  the  greatesl 
calamity  the  world  has  yet  known.  The 
press  of  the  Pacific  alone  can  prevent 
thi>  calamity  and  save  the  world.  From 
now  on  the  greater  part  of  the  world's 
people  will  have  their  homes  in  Pa- 
cific lands.  Their  leaders  should  he 
brought  together  for  hetter  understand- 
ing of  each  others  aims  and  ambitions, 
and  the  press  should  create,  as  it  can. 
a    patriotism   of   the   Pacific. 

In    the   Orient    many    of    the   journal- 
istic leaders  are  graduates  of  an   Amer- 
ican   school    of    journalism    where    they 
have    been    taught,    as    the    foundation 
principle,    that   a    news-gatherer    should 
he  a  gentleman  at   heart  and   in  action. 
This     is     also     a     tradition     among     the 
British    pressmen    in    the   Orient.      This 
leaven   is   permeating    the   Anglo    Saxon 
press   of   the    Far    East   and    should    he 
the  watchword  of  the  vernacular  press. 
This    little    body    of    men    is    having    a 
marked    influence    in    the    Orient ;    the 
leaders    among    the    pressmen     in     the 
Philippines,    China.    Japan    and    Korea, 
know  each   other   personally   and    trust 
each  other.     As  this  circle  enlarges  the 
jingoists    will    find    it    more    difficult    to 
excite    the    imaginations    of    those    who 
do     not     always     think     seriously     and 
investigate.     The  men  of   the  mess   in 
the      Pacific,      when     they      know     each 
other,    will    learn    to    trust    each    other, 
and    in    every    Pacific    land    they     will 
strive    to    he    worthy    of    this    trust    of 
their  distant  confreres   and  the   serious 


problems  of  the  Pacific  will  dissipate 
in  fleecy  clouds,  knowledge  of  each 
others  affairs  will  take  the  place  of 
ignorance  and  prejudice  and  under- 
standing will  supersede  misunderstand- 
ing, if  only  our  press  of  the  Pacific 
will    consummate   its   high    mission. 

Perhaps  there  should  be  two  distinct 
bodies   in   the   future    Pan- Pacific   Press 
Conference:    One    a    League    of    Pacific 
Newspapers    composed     of     proprietors 
and  the  husiness  staff,  that  should  out- 
line   the    general    husiness    policy,    deal 
with  the  cost  of  paper  and  news-gather- 
ing, reducing  their  cost  by  co-operative 
methods  and  perhaps  reducing  the  cost 
of   international   advertising  to   the  ad- 
vertiser   through     similar    methods    of 
co-operation   among  the  business   staffs 
of  the  newspapers  and  magazines  pub- 
lished in  Pacific  lands.     The  other  and 
more  important  body,  for  the  peace  of 
the  world  at  least,  should  be  the  actual 
disseminators  of   news   and  information 
concerning  Pacific  lands.     They   should 
meet  together  to  know  each  other  and 
to  plan  work  that  will  make  the  people 
of  each   Pacific  land  know   more  about 
the  people  of  other  Pacific  lands.     The 
first    step    such    a    body    should    take 
would  be  to   secure  a   reduction   in   the 
cable  and  wireless  press   rates   between 
Pacific   lands,   and  actual   free   trade   in 
wireless   press   correspondence,   unham- 
pered by  any  private  or  other  contracts 
that  would  militate  against  the  cheapest 
possible    rates    in   the    dissemination    of 
international   news   and   informations. 

The  late  ex-Secretary  of  the  Interior, 
Franklin  K.  Lane,  ex-President  Wilson, 
Senator  Henry  Cabot  Lodge  and  Presi- 
dent Harding  have  all  voiced  the  opin- 
ion that  in  the  Pacific,  having  behind 
it  thousands  of  years  of  traditions  of 
peace,  that  here  might  be  the  logical 
birth  place  of  a  real  League  of  Nations. 
Who  knows  but  that  it  may  not  be  the 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


19 


mission   of  the  press   of   the   Pacific   to 
bring'  this  about. 

Next  September  there  is  to  be  held 
in  Honolulu  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union  the  first  Pan-Pacific 
Commercial  Conference.  It  is  hoped 
that  President  Harding  may  be  present, 
and  should  he  find  it  possible  to  be 
here  at  that  time,  he  will.  If  he  does 
come  to  Hawaii,  the  Pan-Pacific  Union 
will  invite  the  presidents  and  premiers 
of  all  Pacific  lands  to  meet  here  in 
friendly  conference. 

Then,  perhaps  once  more,  the  press- 
men of  the  Pacific  may  be  asked  to 
gather  in  honor  of  such  an  informal 
meeting  of  the  heads  of  Pacific  govern- 
ments, it  would  be  an  inspiration  for 
better  understanding  the  future  results 
of  which  might  be  incalculably  good. 

The  Pan-Pacific  Union  at  the  request 
of  Dean  Walter  Williams,  President  of 
the  Press  Congress  of  the  World,  issued 
the  call  for  the  first  Pan-Pacific  Press 
Conference,  with  the  understanding  that 
it  was  to  be  a  permanent  body  to  meet 
for  conference  every  two  or  three 
years ;  a  regional  conference  body  af- 
filiated with  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World  and  one  that  would  stimulate 
the  holding  of  annual  local  press  con- 
ferences in  the  Orient,  Australasia  and 
on  the  Pacific  Coast  of  America. 


The  Pan-Pacific  Union  gladly  as- 
sumed the  responsibility  for  the  call, 
and  further  offers  its  services  to  the 
permanent  organization. 

The  Pan-Pacific  Educational  Confer- 
ence, recently  held  here,  passed  a  num- 
ber of  recommendations  that  it  re- 
quested the  Union  to  carry  out,  among 
these  the  publishing  of  its  proceedings 
and  the  preparation  for  and  the  calling 
of  a  second  Pan-Pacific  Educational 
Conference.  The  Union  has  secured 
the  services  of  Dr.  F.  F.  Bunker,  to 
assist  in  carrying  out  the  recommenda- 
tions made  and  has  appropriated  suffi- 
cient funds  for  carrying  out  most  of 
them. 

In  the  matter  of  aiding  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference  along  kindred 
lines  I  am  certain  that  the  Union  would 
endeavor  to  carry  out  any  recommen- 
dations of  this  Conference,  if  so  re- 
quested.    We  wish  to  serve. 

The  workers  in  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union  are  constantly  brought  face  to 
face  with  the  fact  that  for  good  or 
evil  the  power  of  the  press  will  guide 
the  destinies  of  the  Pacific.  There  is 
need  today  as  never  before  that  you 
men  of  the  press  give  us  the  best  that 
is  in  you  toward  the  dissemination  of 
truthful  and  helpful  facts  concerning 
Pacific  lands.  What  will  you  do  about 
it — how  can  we  aid  ? 


20 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


The  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 


Hon.  M  \rk  Cohen 

Editor,  and  Member  of  the  Upper  House 
of  Parliament,  New  Zealand 


I.  like  the  previous  speaker,  have 
been  brought  here  today  somewhat 
under  false  pretenses.  We  were  given 
to  understand  yesterday  afternoon  that 
it  was  desired  by  the  Congress  and  by 
others  who  had  taken  an  interest  in 
these  proceedings  to  wipe  off  the  slate 
all  set  addresses  in  order  that  the 
various  functions  set  down  for  today 
should  go  on  uninterruptedly  and  that 
those  promised  stories  should  be  handed 
in  to  the  Executive  of  the  Press  Con- 
gress for  careful  sub-editing  and  pos- 
sibly future  publication.  In  that  be- 
lief  I   have  left  my  story  at   home. 

I  see  I  am  set  down  on  the  program 
to  speak  of  the  evolution  of  the  press 
of  New  Zealand,  which  will  form  the 
subject  nf  the  paper  that  1  have  pre- 
pared, bui  I  am  not  going  to  worry 
ynii  this  afternoon  with  a  long  recital 
of  the  difficulties  of  those  journeymen 
printers  who  as  far  back  as  1839  set 
up  the  printing  press  in  Xew  Zealand 
and  have  brought  it  since  to  a  fairly 
satisfactory  condition  so  far  as  its  aims, 
objects,  purposes  and  results  are  con- 
cerned. In  that  paper  you  will  find  that 
I  claimed  that  the  honor  of  being  the 
first  printer  in  Xew  Zealand  should  be 
given  to  one  William  Colens,  who  came 
to  New  Zealand  Ion-  before  the  sov- 
ereignty of  the  British  crown  was 
established  and  who  came  long  before 
any  war  had  devastated  our  country 
and  who  came  to  preach  the  gospel  as 
right  hand  assistant  to  that  great  Chris- 
tian Selwyn  who  brought  the  gospel  to 
the      Mauri-.        In      that     capacity      he 


printed  and  published  a  series  of  Angli- 
can church  publications  and  necessarily 
brought  from  England  with  him  an 
ordinary  printing  press,  certain  fonts 
of  type  and  a  quantity  of  paper. 

Then  you  have  to  bear  in  mind  that 
New  Zealand  was  colonized  from  very 
different  angles.  The  years  1839,  '40 
and  '51  mark  the  last  of  the  great 
colonizing  efforts  made  by  Great  Bri- 
tain. There  came  to  New  Zealand 
from  Britain  itself  the  very  salt  of  the 
midland  counties,  those  counties  in 
which  the  great  English  universities  ot 
Oxford  and  Cambridge  are  situated, 
men  who  had  received  a  very  liberal 
education  themselves  and  who  were  de- 
sirous of  paving  a  way  in  the  South 
Pacific  for  a  country  wherein  they 
would  be  freed  from  trouble  of  Eu- 
ropean wars  and  heavy  taxation  and 
might  find  a  country  sufficiently  large 
to  make  successful  their  project,  of  till- 
ing the  earth  and  making  respectable 
incomes   therefrom. 

Then  the  Scotch  were  sent  from 
Edinburgh  at  the  time  of  the  great  dis- 
ruption in  their  church.  They  came  to 
Otago,  arriving  there  in  1848.  Again, 
in  Nelson,  new  settlers  came  and  the 
New  Zealand  Land  Company,  which 
was  the  first  of  these  colonizing  ex- 
periments starting  out  as  it  did  from 
London. 

The  result  of  these  efforts  was  signifi- 
cant, hirst,  each  expedition  brought 
with  it  either  a  journeyman  printer 
among  the  passengers  or  a  plant  for 
printing   and    thus    it    came    about    that 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


21 


there  was  established  first  in  Welling- 
ton as  the  official  organ  of  the  New 
Zealand  Company,  the  Gazette,  which 
afterwards  developed  into  a  newspaper. 
Then  came  a  weekly  paper  in  Otago  at 
Dunedin  called  the  Witness;  then  an- 
other paper  in  the  North  Island.  Fur- 
ther still,  as  a  medium  of  communication 
between  the  settlers  in  Auckland  and  the 
southern  province,  another  organ  of  pub- 
lic opinion  was  founded. 

We  claim  also  that  the  first  daily 
paper  ever  published  in  New  Zealand, 
The  Otago  Daily  Times,  had  its  origin 
in  18ol  when  gold  was  first  discovered 
in  that  part  of  the  country.  This  was 
an  organ  of  public  opinion  whose  man- 
ager was  among  you  during  the  greater 
portion  of  this  sitting,  but  who  had  un- 
fortunately to  leave  with  his  colleagues 
by  the  Makura. 

It  was  most  unfortunate  so  far  as  we 
New  Zealanders  were  concerned  that  we 
did  not  receive  advices  of  the  postpone- 
ment of  the  date  of  meeting  of  this 
Press  Congress.  Otherwise  our  itiner- 
ary might  have  been  differently  shaped. 
We  might  have  traveled  via  Raratonga, 
Tahiti  and  San  Francisco,  coming  over 
with  the  main  body  of  the  American 
journalists  in  time  to  take  part  in  the 
opening  session  of  your  Congress. 

We  came  unannounced  as  the  advance- 
guard  of  the  Congress.  We  were  met 
by  a  fellow  colonist  and  taken  to  what 
were  to  be  our  homes  for  the  time  being, 
and  let  me  say  here  in  the  presence  of 
this  goodly  company  that  if  only  for  the 
friendships  that  we  have  made  in  this 
place ;  if  only  for  the  great  kindnesses 
we  have  received  at  the  hands  of  all  and 
sundry  classes  and  if  only  for  the  good 
fellowships  we  have  been  able  to  make 
and  which  we  trust  we  will  be  able  to 
maintain  during  the  rest  of  our  lives 
then  our  journey,  apart  from  any  thing- 
else,  has  not  been  a  trivial  one,  but  one 
that  we  can  look  back  on  the  rest  of  our 


days.  Nothing  can  be  more  sincere  than 
the  friendships  we  have  made ;  nothing 
more  pleasing  than  to  renew  our  ac- 
quaintance with  the  President  of  your 
Congress,  and  nothing  more  delightful 
than  to  go  away  with  the  knowledge 
that  we  have  formed  friendships  that 
will  be  ever  memorable  incidents  apart 
from  the  work  we  hope  to  accomplish  in 
the  future  of  this  great  World's  Con- 
gress. 

It  is  not  my  purpose  to  go  through 
the  contents  of  the  paper  I  have  writ- 
ten. Those  of  you  who  care  to  hear 
more  about  the  progress  of  press  work 
in  New  Zealand  will  have  an  opportunity 
later  of  doing  so.  I  would  only  say  for 
myself  in  regard  to  the  project  that  you 
have  started  here  today  that  I  hope  it 
may  be  successfully  launched.  I  hon- 
estly believe,  endowed  as  it  is  with  the 
wisdom  and  the  experience  and  the  en- 
thusiasm of  the  gentleman  who  has  con- 
stituted its  executive  during  the  six 
years  of  its  existence  it  cannot  fail  of 
achievement  and  the  same  measure  of 
success  that  the  Press  Congress  has 
achieved  during  the  first  years  of  its 
existence.  I  know  it  is  within  the 
bounds  of  possibility  that  the  executive 
will  send  as  missionaries  to  the  southern 
seas,  particularly  Australia,  and  the 
country  I  came  from,  your  good  friend 
Dr.  Bunker  and  your  irreproachable  and 
unmatchable  Ford,  and  I  trust  they  will 
be  able  to  pay  a  visit  first  to  New  Zea- 
land and  will  gather  into  their  company 
a  man  there  who  I  know  will  be  of  the 
greatest  possible  assistance  to  them.  I 
refer  to  Mr.  Milner,  the  head  of  one  of 
our  great  scholastic  departments;  who 
is  full  of  love  for  everything  that  makes 
for  the  advancement  of  humanity  and 
liberal  art  and  a  man  who  will  work 
until  he  dies  for  the  advancement  of 
those  great  ideals  that  I  know  possess 
his  soul.  If  Mr.  Bunker  and  Mr.  Ford 
and  Mr.  Milner  are  sent  away  from  here 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

as  the  evangels  of  this  great  institution  I    have  got  tired  of  hearing  my  own 

and  make  use  of  their  opportunities,  and  voice,  but  take  it   from  me  as  speaking 

I    know    their   capacity   to   do   it.   then    I  from    my    very    heart    of    hearts    that    it 

am  quite  satisfied  that  in  a  few  years  to  has  been  the  greatest  delight  of  my  life 

come    1    may    read    of   your   doings    and  coming  here  as   I   do  today  for  the  fifth 

shall  he-  able  to  say  as   I    say   today   with  time    to    renew    most    pleasant    acquaint- 

all    sincerity   that   you   have   done    wisely  aneeships,  to   form   new   friendships   and 

and   well   in   placing   on   a   sure  and   last-  to    go    away    satisfied    that    in    my    little 

ing    foundation     an    institution     that    is  humble   way   I   have   done   something  to 

capable  of  doing  much  for  the  cause  of  promote  the  cause  of  this  great   institu- 

civilization.  tioti. 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


23 


The   Press  and   Peace   in   the   Pacific 


By  Henry  Stead 

Editor,  "Stead's  Review",  Melbourne,  Australia. 


I  regret  most  deeply  that  illness  pre- 
vents my  being  present  at  the  first  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference,  to  attend 
which  I  traveled  specially  from  Aus- 
tralia. 

I  regard  this  Conference  as  of  the 
very  greatest  importance  for  the  po- 
litical centre  of  the  world  has  now 
shifted  from  Europe  to  the  Pacific.  In 
the  old  world  the  great  war  has  left  the 
Allies  supreme.  Their  word  is  law  and 
they  realize  that  if  they  would  main- 
tain peace  they  must  agree  amongst 
themselves.  In  the  Pacific  however  these 
same  Powers  are  by  no  means  a  happy 
family.  They  do  not  agree,  and  their 
differences,  minor  though  most  of  them 
be,  actually  threaten  the  peace  of  the 
world.  That  being  so  every  effort  put 
forth  to  improve  the  relations  between 
the  Pacific  nations  is  of  peculiar  im- 
portance at  the  present  time.  We  news- 
paper men  realize  how  great  an  in- 
fluence we  can  and  do  wield  among  the 
people,  and  if  we.  in  conference,  can 
come  to  some  understanding  amongst 
ourselves,  can  evolve  some  plan  of 
united  action  with  the  object  of  enabling 
the  Pacific  nations  to  get  to  know  one 
another  better  and  thus  avoid  the  un- 
necessary friction  which  so  easily  arises, 
we  will  indeed  have  done  well. 

It  is  an  astonishing  fact,  which  too 
few  people  properly  realize,  that  whilst 
all  the  great  nations  are  spending  huge 
sums  on  making  preparations  for  de- 
fence and  war,  not  one  of  them  is 
spending  a  single  cent  in  order  to  sys- 
tematically attempt  to  make  the  war 
they   fear   impossible.      Millions   of   dol- 


lars are  spent  on  building  gigantic 
superdreadnaughts  which  will  be  obso- 
lete in  five  years,  but  not  one  dollar  is 
set  aside  with  the  object  of  promoting 
better  relations  between  the  nations,  get- 
ting them  to  know  each  other  better, 
thus  making  war  less  likely.  It  was  a 
well  known  American  statesman  who,  at 
a  time  of  crises  prior  to  the  late  war, 
declared :  "Give  me  the  price  of  a 
single  battleship  and  I  will  undertake 
to  make  this  threatened  struggle  impos- 
sible." 

Just  suppose  for  a  moment  that  the 
Administration  were  to  set  aside  no 
more  than  one  percent  of  its  war  ap- 
propriations for  use  in  peace  propo- 
ganda.  Why  there  would  be  no  war ! 
Today  it  costs  at  least  $25,000,000  to 
build  a  dreadnought.  What  could  not 
be  done  with  one  percent  of  that  huge 
sum  for  the  cause  of  peace.  But  no 
Government  at  present  sets  aside  even 
0.1  percent  of  its  war  expenditures  for 
peace  purposes. 

Several  years  ago  when  the  mayors 
of  French  towns  were  visiting  England, 
having  been  invited  to  do  so  by  their 
English  confreres,  all  the  money  re- 
quired for  their  entertainment  had  to 
be  raised  privately.  The  British  Gov- 
ernment, although  most  sympathetic, 
had  actually  no  funds  available  to  pro- 
vide these  visitors  with  even  one  ban- 
quet !•  Yet  when  distinguished  soldiers 
from  abroad  came  to  England  the  War 
Office  had  always  plenty  of  money  to 
entertain  them  with.  Every  one  admits 
that  visits  of  this  nature  helped  to  bring 
about    a    better    understanding    between 


24 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


England  and  France,  but  the  expense  of 
such  visits  had  to  be  borne  always  by 
private  individuals.  That  is  not  righl 
and  I  think  it  is  the  duty  of  every 
newspaper  man  to  try  and  induce  his 
particular  Government  to  set  aside  a 
definite  sum,  better  still  a  fixed  percent- 
age of  its  defence  and  war  expenditure, 
which  should  be  used  in  order  to  facili- 
tate visits  of  representative  men  and 
workers  from  one  country  to  another; 
should  be  used  to  disseminate  correct 
information  about  one  country  in  an- 
other, and  above  all  should  be  utilized 
to  run  to  earth  in  one  country  the  lies 
which  are  at  present  so  widely  cir- 
culated about   another. 

What  is  needed  in  every  country  is 
a  Ministry  of  Friendship  in  charge  of 
a  man  whose  duty  it  should  be  to  ap- 
ply the  grease  of  truth  to  the  interna- 
tional machinery  when  the  friction  be 
tween  its  parts  became  acute.  We  have- 
Secretaries  of  State,  for  Wrar,  for  the 
Navy,  Ministers  of  Defence.  Immensely 
complicated  diplomatic  services  wdiose 
nominal  duty  it  is  to  work  for  peace 
but  who,  alas,  are  much  more  concerned 
in  finding  out  the  latest  devices  other 
nations  have  adopted  in  their  armies 
and  navies  than  they  are  in  smoothing 
away  those  little  irritations  which  so 
quickly  give  cause  for  war. 

In  Australia  the  year  before  the  war 
we  spent  .almost  £6.000,000  on  the  army 
and  navy.  Unless  the  Disarmament 
Conference  at  Washington  is  snccessfnl 
we  shall  have  to  spend  much  more  than 
that  in  coming  years.  The  taxpayers  in 
the  Commonwealth,  already  complain- 
ing, will  strongly  protest,  but  protests 
will  be  of  no  avail  if  other  fleets  of  the 
Pacific  are  being  increased  in  size.  The 
man  who  has  to  find  the  money  is 
likely  to  approve  the  suggestion  that  a 
very  small  part  of  it  should  be  used  to 
used  to  make  the  war  he  fears  impos- 
sible.    Australia    could    well     afford    to 


spend  0.1  percent  of  its  defense  appro- 
priation on  work  for  peace  in  the  Pa- 
cific. £60,000  is  a  small  amount,  yet 
carefully  expended  it  should  make  the 
raising  of  £6,000,000  for  defence  pur- 
poses unnecessary.  If  all  the  Pacific 
countries  were  to  spend  no  more  than 
0.1  percent  of  their  appropriations  for 
armies  and  navies  on  systematic  peace 
propaganda  I  am  convinced  that  the 
need  for  those  armies  and  those  navies 
would    quickly   disappear. 

We  are,  I  think,  all  seized  with  the 
fact  that  wars  are  almost  always  due  to 
misunderstandings  which  had  time  per- 
mitted could  have  been  cleared  up.  But 
whilst  the  machinery  for  making  war 
is  always  well  oiled,  efficient  and  up-to- 
date,  no  special  machinery  for  preserv- 
ing peace  exists  at  all.  It  seems  to  me 
that  we  might  well  work  for  the  setting 
up  of  such  machinery  and  urge  our  res- 
pective governments  to  set  aside  a  mere 
fraction  of  the  huge  sums  they  spend 
on  getting  ready  for  war  to  be  used  in 
bringing  about  a  better  understanding 
between  Pacific  peoples,  in  running  a 
campaign  of  truth  to  counteract  the 
wild  and  foolish  rumors  which  at  pres- 
ent furnish  fuel  for  misunderstandings 
and  mutual  distrust. 

But  whilst  I  think  it  is  the  bounded 
duty  of  governments  to  systematically 
work  for  peace  and  not  concern  them- 
selves only  in  preparing  for  war,  it  will 
be  difficult  to  bring  them  to  a  realiza- 
tion of  that  fact.  Meanwhile  can  we 
not  do  something  ourselves  to  counter- 
act these  lies  and  rumors  which  work 
so  much  mischief  in  our  relations  with 
other  Pacific  countries.  We  are  severely 
handicapped  because  we  ourselves  do 
not  know  the  truth  about  our  neighbors 
and  not  knowing  the  truth,  we  cannot 
contradict  the  lie.  It  would  be  well  if 
every  large  newspaper  or  group  of 
newspapers  were  to  have  a  reliable  cor- 
respondent in  each   country  washed  by 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE.  25 

the  Pacific,  who  could  be  relied  on  to  other  hand,  when  they  have  to  pay  even 
give  accurate  information  himself  and  a  small  sum  for  it,  their  interest  is  pre- 
to  report  false  news  which  was  being  served  and  when  they  would  throw  a 
circulated  in  the  country  where  he  was  batch  of  free  articles  into  the  waste- 
living  about  that  one  where  the  papers  paper  basket,  they  would  carefully 
he  represented  were  located.  Expense  peruse  those  they  had  paid  to  have  sent 
is  of  course  the  chief  argument  against  them. 

this  plan,  but  already  some  of  the  Aus-  The    scheme   would    require    working 

tralian   papers   have   made   a   beginning  out   and   considerable   modification   but, 

and  a  reliable  correspondent  represents  properly  done,  it  should  be  of  immense 

the  Melbourne  Herald  in  Japan.  value  in  bringing  about  a  better  under- 

It  is   to   be   hoped   that   other  papers  standing  between  the  Pacific  peoples.    It 

will  follow  suit.  But  correspondents  are  1S  because  we   do   not   understand   each 

a  luxury  which  great  newspapers   only  other>  because  we  are  suspicious  of  each 

can  indulge  in,  the  lesser  journals  have  other<  that  we  think  and  talk  of  war.  If 

to   rely   upon   what   they   get    from   the  we    knew    more    about    each    other    we 

large   dailies    and    from    chance    letters,  would  think  much  less  about  war.    The 

The   Pan-Pacific  Union,   which   has   al-  Press  can  do  more  than  anY  other  agency 

ready  done  so  much  to  promote  a  better  to  bring  about  the  desired  understand- 

feeling  in  the  Pacific,  might  be  of  use  m£-     Jt  can  fr°wn  on  scare  rumors  and 

here.     It    might    act    as    a    distribution  seek  always  to  soothe  instead  of  ruffle 

centre  of  reliable  news  concerning  every  the  suceptibilities  of  its  neighbors.    The 

Pacific    country.      There    are 'plenty    of  Fa^c  b<fn-   now  th,e,  centre1  of  world 

,      .       .           ,.         ,  ■  ,            ,  j    ,  politics    the    responsibilities    thrown    on 

lournals    in   Australia   which    would    be  .fl      _,.__.      r                       . 

,    ,         ,            .               .  .          ...          ,  the  Pacific  Press  are  great,  far  greater 

glad  to  have  short  articles   telling,   for  .          .        .                   ,  °      , '          °  T 

.          ,  ,                ...          •      T  than  they  have  ever  been  before.     1  am 

instance,  about   labor  conditions   in     a-  c  ,     ,  ,,    ,             .,,     .            ,, 

'     _,  ,             ,               ,  .  ,           J .  ,  confident  that  we  will  rise  to  the  occa- 

pan    and    China;    plenty    which    would  sion  and  do  everything  in  our  power  to 

publish   brief  accounts   of   social  move-  dispd  the  danger  of  war  and  bring  in 

ments  m  other  countries  and  so  on  and  that  era  of  peace  which   we  &Q   fondly 

so  forth.     How  far  they  would  be  pre-  imagmed  would  be  ours  once  the  great 

pared   to   support   a   "truth"   service   of  war    had    been    won.     I,    at    any    rate, 

this  kind  it  is  difficult  to  say,  but  my  pledge  myself  to  do   everything'  in  my 

experience    certainly    suggests    that    it  power  to   assist  any   movement   started 

would  be  unwise  to  offer  it  free.     Indi-  at  this  Conference  which  has  as  an  ob- 

viduals  and  newspapers,  whilst  at  first  ject  the  bringing  of  mutual  understand- 

welcoming  something  for  nothing,  soon  ing  and   trust   amongst   the   peoples   of 

cease   to    have    interest    in    it.      On   the  the  Pacific. 


26 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


A   Pacific   Understanding 


By  Guy  Inxks 
Associate  Editor  "The  Herald,"  Melbourne,  Australia. 


Throughout  his  tour  to  Australia  and 
New  Zealand,  Lord  Northcliffe,  the  prin- 
cipal  proprietor  of  the  Ix»ndon  "Times," 
and  one  of  the  greatest  of  the  British  Em- 
pire's journalists,  lost  no  opportunity  of 
emphasizing  the  importance,  particularly 
to  Australia  and  the  British  possessions 
in  the  Pacific,  of  the  Disarmament  Con- 
ference  to  be  held  at  Washington.  He 
pointed  out  that  at  this  conference.  Au- 
stralia's fate  mighl  be  settled,  and.  large- 
ly as  the  result  of  his  utterances,  the  five 
and  a  half  million  inhabitants  of  the 
great  Island  Commonwealth  are  begin- 
ning, perhaps  belatedly,  to  realize  how 
vital  to  them  and  to  their  country  are  the 
problems  to  he  discussed  at  the  Confer- 
ence, and  how  much  they  are  concerned 
in  the  result  of  its  deliberations.  It  was 
originally  understood  that  the  interests 
of  Australia,  as  a  componenl  part  ot  the 
British  Empire,  would  he  safeguarded  by 
the  I '.ritisli  delegation  to  this  great  inter- 
national congress;  and,  though  Australia 
trusts  her  Motherland  to  the  full,  more 
than  one  close  student  of  die  situation 
regretted  thai  die  Australian  Common- 
wealth was  not  to  be  represented  indi- 
vidually and  directly  by  one  of  her  own 
statesmen,  who  could  interpret  clearly 
ami  emphatically  die  attitude  and  ideals 
.if  his  nation  in  regard  to  problems  pecu- 
liarly her  own  -such,  for  instance,  as  the 
maintenance  of  the  White  Australia 
policy.  This  is  of  particular  importance 
in  view  of  the  statement  that  Japan  in- 
tends to  seek  the  removal  of  restrictions 
upon  immigration  from  Japan  to  other 
Pacific  land-.  Very  welcome,  therefore, 
is  the  announcement  of  the  Prime  Min- 


ister of  Australia.  William  Morris 
Hughes,  that,  as  the  outcome  of  com- 
munications with  Washington,  Senator 
G.  F.  Pearce,  Minister  for  Defence,  has 
been  appointed  to  represent  Australia  at 
the  Disarmament  Conference.  Senator 
Pearce,  who  was  appointed  to  his  present 
position  in  the  cabinet  before  the  war,  can 
be  relied  upon,  by  reason  of  his  long 
political  experience  and  his  thorough  fa- 
miliarity with  the  problems  that  will  be 
discussed,  for  the  ample  presentation  of 
Australia's  case,  particularly  as  he  will 
have  full  knowledge,  through  his  close 
personal  association  with  Mr.  Hughes. 
of  the  transactions  at  the  recent  Empire 
Conference  of  Prime  Ministers.  The 
appointment  of  a  direct  representative  is 
clear  proof  that  Australia  realizes  to  the 
full  that  her  future  is  as  closely  involved 
in  the  outcome  of  the  Washington  Con- 
ference as  is  that  of  any  nation  border- 
ing on  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

It  is  in  the  Pacific,  in  days  to  come. 
that  the  form  of  our  future  civilization 
may  be  decided.  Peace  in  the  Pacific  is 
a  suret)  for  the  peace  of  the  world.  A 
stroke  of  the  pen  may  forestall  and  pre- 
vent the  blow  of  the  sword.  By  strokes 
of  the  pen  has  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  been 
created;  and  there  are  no  bounds  to  the 
hopes  which  that  Union  may  inspire  for 
the  dawning  of  the  day  "when  nation 
shall  not  lift  up  sword  against  nation."  It 
is  fortunate  and  fitting  that  the  Pan- 
Pacific  press  congress  should  precede  the 
great  conference  at  Washington;  for 
there  is  as  yet  no  other  agency  in  exis- 
tence so  well  calculated  to  promote  that 
mutal  understanding  between  the  Pacific 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


27 


nations  and  that  frank  appreciation  of 
the  aims  which  they  have  in  common  to 
safeguard  civilization  as  is  this  organiza- 
tion of  practical  idealists. 

That  the  shore  of  the  Pacific  is  the 
threshold  of  the  world  has  heen  realized 
by  Mr.  Hughes,  who,  addressing  the 
Commonwealth  House  of  Representatives 
shortly  after  his  return  from  the  confer- 
ence in  England  of  the  Prime  Ministers 
of  the  British  Empire,  said  in  effect  that 
the  solution  of  the  problems  of  the  Pacific 
was  essentially  a  precedent  to  the  satis- 
factory conduct  and  conclusion  of  the 
Disarmament  Conference.  It  needs  no 
profound  study  of  his  utterance  to  demon- 
strate its  truth.  So  long  as  there  is  a 
possibility  of  this  ocean  becoming  the 
arena  of  the  world  in  arms,  for  just  so 
long  will  the  certainty  exist  that  those 
nations  taking  part  in  the  conference  at 
Washington  will  endeavor  to  attain  and 
maintain  that  state  of  overwhelming  pre- 
pardness  which  prefers  arsenals  to  arbi- 
tration, and,  in  too  early  a  resort,  cruisers 
to  congresses  of  peace.  Every  possible 
step  should  be  taken  to  ensure  that  each 
participant  has  concrete  rather  than 
piously  hopeful  reasons  for  the  belief 
that  the  meeting  will  achieve  more  than 
ever  Hague  Conference  has  attempted 
aforetime,  and  that  there  must  be  no 
feeling,  however  diplomatically  con- 
cealed that  though  a  colleague  has  his 
cards  on  the  table,  there  is  a  gun  on  his 
hip. 

Much,  therefore,  rests  with  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Congress.  Assembled  on 
one  of  the  fairest  isles  of  a  sea  which 
has  ever  been. a  field  of  exploration  and  of 
commerce  rather  than  the  battle-ground 
of  contending  navies,  it  can  serve  greatly 
in  making  that  sea  Pacific  in  fame  as  it 
is  Pacific  in  name.  By  promoting  an  in- 
ternational understanding,  honest,  frank 
and  free  from  Chauvinistic  propaganda 
masquerading  as  patriotism,  it  can  go 
far  to  annihilate  those  mischievous  mis- 


understandings, too  often  deliberately 
fostered,  which,  even  if  they  do  not  lead 
to  direct  war,  yet  create  an  atmosphere 
of  unrest  and  distrust  which  can  be  para- 
lysing if  not  actually  disastrous.  No- 
where does  one  realize  this  as  in  Hono- 
lulu, standing  as  it  does  as  a  marine 
telephone  exchange  where  the  world's 
wires  converge ;  where,  in  the  words  of 
Emerson, 

"Every  day  brings  a  ship — 
Every  ship  brings  a  word." 
Shall  not  the  efforts  of  the  Pan-Pacific 

bring   the   consummation   voiced   by   the 

poet  : 

"Well  for  him  who  hath  no  fear. 
Looking-  seaward,  well  assured 
That  the  word  the  vessel  brings 
Is  the  word  he  longs  to  hear." 
And  that  word  is — "Peace." 

As  has  been  said  by  resolution  duly  at- 
tested, the  Congress  offers  a  co-ordinat- 
ing agency  which  can  take  the  initiative 
and  can  stimulate,  in  the  wisest  and  wid- 
est sense,  education  to  common  ends  in 
the  various  Pacific  nations.  And  it  can 
"undertake  either  directly  or  indirectly 
*  *  *  a  thorough  scientific  investigation 
of  the  causes  of  war  and  assist  education- 
al machinery  in  the  various  nations  to  re- 
move causes  which  may  contribute  to  war 
making." 

Now,  the  power-house  of  that  machin- 
ery is  the  Press.  No  other  medium  is  so 
certain  in  its  operation  or  so  far-reaching 
in  its  activities.  It  is  for  the  Congress  to 
take  advantage  of  it,  and  by  its  legiti- 
mate use.  discountenancing  the  spread  of 
misleading-  or  merely  sectional  propagan- 
da of  the  baser  sort,  to  establish  an  under- 
standing among  Pacific  countries  which 
will  form  the  best  guarantee  that  the 
world  can  have  for  a  reduction  of  arma- 
ments, or,  failing  their  immediate  reduc- 
tion, a  halt  in  that  adding  of  armor-plate 
to  armor-plate  and  weapon  to  weapon 
which  makes  a  nation  so  ponderous   in 


28 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


its    might    thai    it    must    through    sheer 
weight  fall  upon  its  neighbor. 

Excellent  within  their  limits  as  are 
the  various  new-  services  to  Australia, 
and    widespread    as    arc    their    ultimate 

iurces,  they  are  al  present  too  costly,  as 
was  pointed  out  at  the  recenl  Imperial 
Press  Congress  held  at  Ottawa,  to  per- 
mit of  their  full  use  as  a  factor  in 
promoting  international  understanding. 
There  is  too  little  opportunity  for  the 
chronicling  of  consecutive  and  construc- 
tive steps  in  social  progress,  in  altruistic 

Ejislation  and  its  effects,  in  great  educa- 
tional movements,  and  in  efforts  in  any 
country  which  have  for  their  objective  the 
co-ordination  of  international  forces  for 
peace.  Were  a  cheaper  cable  service  pos- 
sible,  particularly  between  countries  bor- 
dering upon  the  Pacific,  Australian  pa- 
pers could  afford  to  a  greater  extent  than 
hey  do  at  present  to  maintain  trust- 
worthy special  correspondents  in  the  im- 

irtant  cities  of  these  lands,  whose  work 
would   go    Ear  to  promote  what  may  be 
described  as  the  entente  cordiale  of  the 
Pacific.     This,  from  the  Australian  point 
of  view,  would  he  preferable  to  the  es- 
tablishment    of    a    news    bureau    which 
would  endeavor  to  serve  the  Australian 
press  as  a   whole.     The  more  important 
Australia!)  papers  prefer  to  maintain  as 
far  as  possible  an   individuality   in   their 
.ice,  at   least  as   far  as  the  two 
in   -roups  of  journals  are  concerned. 
main  groups  are  concerned.    One  of  these 
groups,  which  consists  largely  of  morn- 
ing papei  ives  a  cable  service  which 
is    under   control   of    its   own    managing 
editors  in   London  and    New  York,  and 
the    other,    in    which    the    two    principal 
Australian    evening   journals    (the   Mel- 
bourne ••Herald"  and  the  Sydney  "Sun") 
are           iated,  in  conjunction  with  Reu- 
ters, recei  vices  from  London,  Van- 
couver,   Tokio    and   elsewhere,   although 
London    and    Vancouver    are    the    main 
headquarters.    From  the  point  of  view  of 


accuracy,  general  interest,  and  scope,  this 
latter  service,  always  having  regard  to 
the  restrictions  imposed  by  the  cost  of 
cabling,  reaches,  it  is  generally  acknowl- 
edged, a  high  standard  of  excellence. 
But  it  might  cover  Pacific  news  far  more 
fully  than  it  does  at  present. 

Whether  greater  recourse  could  be  had 
to  wireless  messages  as  a  means  of  se- 
curing a  more  ample  service  is  a  matter 
of  some  doubt.  "Were  the  cost  of  cable 
transmission  made  cheaper,  most  of  the 
existing  drawbacks  could  be  overcome. 
Competition  or  threatened  competition 
by  wireless  might  have  this  effect,  as  the 
cable  companies  might  reduce  their 
charges  in  self-defense.  But  it  remains 
to  be  proved  by  actual  experiment  wheth- 
er an  exclusively  wireless  service  could 
ever  take  the  place  of  cable  news.  A 
partly  wireless  service  has  been  intro- 
duced by  the  Pacific  Cable  Board,  but 
this  is  not  much  used  for  press  purposes. 

It  should  here  be  explained  that  there 
are  two  principal  cable  companies  oper- 
ating routes  to  Australia  from  England. 
One  is  the  Pacific,  by  which  messages 
after  being  transmitted  from  England 
across  the  Atlantic  to  Vancouver  by  the 
Anglo-American  and  Commercial  Com- 
pany's cable,  are  forwarded  from  Montre- 
al by  way  of  Fanning  Island,  Fiji,  and 
Norfolk  Island  to  Southport,  Queensland, 
whence  they  are  distributed  over  Austra- 
lia. There  is  a  branch  cable  from  Nor- 
folk Island  to  New  Zealand.  In  addition, 
there  are  two  submarine  cables  which 
connect  the  latter  Dominion  with  the 
Australian  mainland. 

The  other  principal  organization  is  the 
Eastern  Extension  Cable  Company, 
which,  in  addition  to  the  original  cable 
from  London  to  Port  Darwin,  in  the 
Northern  Territory  of  Australia,  has  du- 
plicated this  line,  and  has  also  laid  a 
cable  from  Great  Britain  via  Durban, 
South  Africa,  to  Fremantle,  West  Au- 
stralia.     There    is   an    alternative    route, 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


29 


partly  belonging  to  the  Eastern  Extension 
Company,  connecting  the  Port  Darwin- 
Singapore  cable  with  London  via  Hong 
Kong,  Shanghai,  and  Russia.  A  cable 
from  Java  to  Cocos  Island  affords  an- 
other route  from  South  Africa  to  Au- 
stralia, and  a  radio  station  at  Cocos 
strengthens  the  line  of  communication  be- 
tween Australia  and  the  East.  Rates  for 
press  cables  from  England  range  from 
seven  cents  to  seventy  two  cents  a  word, 
according  to  whether  they  are  ordinary 
press  or  urgent. 

In  considering  the  question  of  wireless 
competition,  regard  must  be  had  to  the 
fact  that  the  Governments  of  the  various 
Australian  States  were,  and  the  Austra- 
lian Federal  Government  is,  financially 
interested  in  the  continuance  of  the  exist- 
ing cable  services,  inasmuch  the  cable 
companies  were  or  are  subsidided  by 
Government  to  defray  in  part  the  cost  of 
the  service  or  of  laying  the  original  cable. 
With  regard  to  the  Pacific  Cable,  the 
Commonwealth  shares  proportionately  in 
the  profit  or  loss  which  accrues  from  the 
traffic.  The  subsidy  agreement  between 
the  State  Governments  and  the  Eastern 
Extension  Company  expired  in  1900. 

Even  if  present  circumstances,  which 
include  the  terms  of  existing  press  con- 
tracts with  the  cable  companies,  do  not 
permit  of  immediate  recourse  to  wire- 
less, the  prospect  of  its  adoption  might 
be  of  value  as  a  lever  to  secure  a  reduc- 


tion in  cable  rates.  In  any  case,  the 
lowering  of  the  latter  should  be  strongly 
urged  by  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Con- 
gress. 

But  whatever  be  the  ultimate  means 
adopted  to  increase  the  scope  and  effi- 
ciency of  the  news  services  throughout 
the  Pacific,  no  permanent  good  can  be 
achieved  that  is  not  sought  in  a  spirit  of 
forbearance,  understanding,  and  mutual 
comprehension.  Concession  must  meet 
with  concession,  not  challenge  with  chal- 
lenge. The  Pan-Pacific  Union  has  sup- 
plied the  initiative,  and  it  is  for  the  press 
of  the  Pacific  to  follow  its  example.  Na- 
tion by  nation,  it  may  educate  the  world. 
Much  has  already  been  gained  by  the 
gathering  together  in  one  spot,  where 
they  may  interchange  ideas  and  formu- 
late constructive  proposals,  of  so  many 
men  who  are  primarily  a  power  for  the 
dissemination  of  the  truth.  The  torch  of 
enlightenment  has  been  kindled,  and  it 
may  yet  illuminate  the  greater  half  of  the 
globe.  The  acquisition  of  a  better  mu- 
tual knowledge  of  national  aims  and 
aspirations  is  inseparable  from  such  a 
meeting  as  this ;  and  when  those  who 
have  assembled  go  forth  pledged  to 
spread  in  their  own  countries  the  truth 
about  every  other  land,  the  good  that 
will  result  must  be  incalculable.  With 
every  succeeding  conference  the  scope  of 
achievement  will  be  amplified,  until,  in 
Mr.  Alexander  Hume  Ford's  notable 
words,  the  press  has  created  a  patriotism 
of  the  Pacific. 


30 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


The   New   Pacific 


By  Gregorio  Nieva 
Editor,  "Philippines  Review",  Manila.  P.  J. 


We  of.  the  Pacific  wish  to  know  each 
other.  That  is  the  present  trend  of  feel- 
in-'  among  peoples  in  Pacific  countries, 
and  it  is  indeed  most  reassuring. 

The  Pacific  peoples  are  simply  awak- 
ening to  the  fact  that  they  must  have 
something  of  their  own,  that  they  must 
hold  their  own,  and  be  given  due 
chance  to  hold  their  own.  Europe  has 
been,  up  to  this  time,  the  control- 
ling power  in  the  Pacific.  Year 
in  and  year  out,  peoples  on  this  side  of  the 
earth  have  seen  European  policies  going 
hi  unchecked  and  unchanged,  keeping 
themselves  always  behind  the  times, 
without  any  very  alluring  regard  to 
progress,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that 
we  must  advance,  for  we  can  not  stand 
still.  We  must  go  ahead,  and  we  of  the 
Pacific  are  advancing,  thanks  to  God  and 
the  efforts  we  are  making  undauntedly, 
in  spite  of  any  unfavorable  circumstances. 

The  peoples  of  the  Pacific  are  feeling 
a  new  impulse,  an  impulse  toward  Pan- 
Pacific  brotherhood,  toward  a  true  pa- 
triotism of  the  Pacific. 

The  Pacific  is  asserting  itself.  We 
are  asserting  ourselves  on  this  side 
of  the  -lobe  in  the  assurance  that 
our  self-assertion  will  meet  a  generous 
and  unanimous  response  throughout  the 
rest  of  the  world.  It  is  but  logical  that 
we  inu^t  have  a  personality  of  our  own 
and  the  time  has  come  when  we  feel  the 
impulse  unitedly  to  reach  out  and  grasp 
what  the  Almighty  has  so  generously  al- 
lotted to  us  in  the  creation  of  this  world 
The  future  of  the  Pacific  must  be  shared 
in  by  the  peoples  of  the  Americas,  Aus- 
tralasia   and    Asia,    leaving    Europe    for 


Europeans,  until  Europe  too  is  willing 
to  be  but  an  equal  unit  with  the  rest  of 
us  in  this  world  of  ours. 

!  am  indeed  gratified  at  this  new 
unity  spirit  in  the  Pacific.  It  is  in  such 
union  that  we  will  find  our  strength.  It 
is  in  such  union  that  the  basis  of  our 
self-assertion  will  permanently  rest.  It 
is  through  such  union  we  Pacific  people? 
hope  to  manage  our  own  affairs,  to  take 
care  of  our  own  welfare,  to  look  after 
our  own  interests.  Let  Eastern  Asia,  the 
United  States,  Canada,  Australasia,  the 
United  States,  while  each  is  looking 
after  itself,  look  after  our  joint  inter- 
ests, as  Europe  looks  after  herself. 

We  may  regret  that  Europe  is  stub- 
bornly insistent  on  holding  her  own  in 
her  own  peculiar  way,  that  European 
nations  war  against  each  other,  kill  each 
other,  murder  each  other,  and  try  their 
best  to  destroy  each  other,  but  the  main 
thing  is  for  us  to  be  left  alone  in  our 
own  affairs.  The  welfare  of  the  Pacific 
countries  rests  not  upon  Europe.  It  rests 
entirely  upon  our  own  shoulders,  al- 
though the  cooperation  of  Europe  would 
he  of  inestimable  value  and  must  be  se- 
cured, if  Europe  desires  to  have  her  due 
place  in  the  friendship  of  the  Pacific 
countries  which  must  have  their  definite 
say  in  Pacific  matters  and  in  such  lines 
of  world  affairs  as  are  distinctly  their 
own.  I  have  not  the  least  argument  to 
offer  against  the  statement  made  by  Vis- 
count Bryce  that  the  danger  of  the  next 
war  still  is  in  Europe — not  in  the  Pacific, 
opinion  come  true,  for  that  should  prove 
an  actual  relief  to  us.  But  even  on  this 
line  of  thought,   we  must  be  in   mutual 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


31 


understanding"  for  a  concerted  action  in 
case  of  emergency  to  affect  us,  for  we 
suffered  greatly  through  the  last  war, 
which  although  not  a  Pacific  war  de- 
stroyed or  maimed  about  10  per  cent  of 
Australia's  population,  bled  Canada,  com- 
pelled China,  Japan  and  the  Philippines 
to  share  in  the  expense,  crippled  the  trade 
of  the  Pacific,  besides  utterly  handicap- 
ping the  whole  Pacific  world.  We  don't 
want  any  more  wars.  Let  Europe  have 
them.     We  don't  care  for  them. 

But  to  meet  and  cope  with  the  new 
situation  that  is  coming,  we  must  pro- 
vide for  an  adequate  foundation  for  it, 
and  we  can  adequately  have  it  through 
the  formation  of  a  Pan-Pacific  Press  As- 
sociation to  inform  our  own  Pacific  world 


thoroughly  on  matters  chiefly  of  our  own 
concern.  Such  an  association  should 
bring  all  Pacific  countries  into  actual 
cohesion  by  causing  them  to  know  each 
other  better  and  to  know  and  understand 
their  plans  and  ambitions  better  than 
heretofore.  Such  a  Pan-Pacific  press 
association,  by  keeping  secret  diplomacy 
miles  and  miles  away  from  us,  would 
bring  peace  ever  within  our  grasp  and 
this  will  be  accomplished  chiefly  by  hav- 
ing our  own  direct  source  of  proper  infor- 
mation, with  our  own  inter-Pacific  ma- 
chinery properly  running  and  kept  up  to 
promote  the  progress,  welfare  and  safety 
of   the  whole   Pacific. 

We  of  the  Pacific  wish  to  know  each 
other. 


32 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Report   of   the   Committee   on   Resolutions 


Lorrin   A.  Thurston,  Chairman 


I  would  say  that  the  Committee  was 
presented  with  three  apparently  incon- 
sistent  propositions:  one  was  that  this 
Pan-Pacific  (  ongress,  the  permanent  or- 
ganization, should  be  under  the  control 
of  the  World's  Press  Congress;  the 
second  proposition  was  that  it  should  be 
under  the  control  of  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union;  and  the  third,  that  it  should  be 
an  independent  body.  The  duties  of  the 
Committee  have  been  to  try  and  recon- 
cile these  three  propositions,  and  it  was 
recognized,  before  the  initial  steps  were 
taken,  that  there  were  advocates  for  all 
three  propositions. 

Taking  the  last  first,  it  seemed  that 
the  newspaper  men  of  the  Pacific  were 
able  to  handle  their  own  affairs  with- 
out having  to  look  to  anybody  else  for 
advice  or  counsel.  On  the  other  hand, 
we  recognized  that  it  is  an  unorganized 
body,  so  far  as  having  any  paid  official, 
and  experience  has  demonstrated  that 
an  unpaid  organization  of  men  with 
other  business  to  attend  to  is  liable  to 
interest,  and  affairs  are  apt  to  lag  be- 
hind, whereas  a  permanently  organized 
body  with  paid  officials,  such  as  is  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union,  whose  first  business 
is  I-  carry  out  the  objects  of  that  organ- 
ization, will  be  much  more  promptly 
attended  to.  It  is  desirable  to  allow  the 
Pan-Pacific  Union  to  utilize  its  machin- 
ery for  carrying  out  this  object.  As  to 
the  Press  Conference,  the  Committee 
»gnizes  the  extreme  advantage  of 
being  part  and  parcel  of  a  working 
organization,  and  therefore  having  the 
moral  as  well  as  the  positive  and  ma- 
terial support  of  thai  organization  when 
it     had     formulated     policies     which     it 


wished  to  have  incorporated  into  its 
policies,  consequently  the  Committee  has 
felt  strongly  that  it  was  extremely  de- 
sirable to  have  the  three  policies  com- 
bined if  possible,  and  the  resolutions  I 
will  now  present  are  an  attempt  to  do 
that. 

A  second  problem  presented  was  as  to 
the  method  of  control  of  the  organiza- 
tion, the  difficulties  being,  on  the  one 
hand,  that  it  should  be  democratic  and 
that  every  member  of  the  Congress 
should  have  something  to  say  in  regard 
to  its  policies,  but,  on  the  other  hand. 
our  members  are  so  scattered  that,  in 
order  to  secure  promptness  and  efficiency 
of  action,  it  is  necessary  to  have  con- 
centrated control  for  current  work. 

We  have  attempted  in  that  respect  to 
give  a  control  to  every  member  of  the 
Congress  when  the  meetings  take  place. 
In  order  to  give  a  partial  general  con- 
trol by  the  members  during  the  inter- 
vals between  meetings,  the  scheme  has 
been  devised  of  having  a  general  com- 
mittee which  shall  consist  of  at  least 
one  member  from  every  country  in  the 
organization.  In  order  that  this  may 
never  delay  operations,  the  countries  be- 
ing scattered  along  the  Pacific,  requiring 
a  month  or  two  for  full  consideration, 
the  additional  scheme  was  devised  of 
having  a  central  steering  committee  of 
three  persons,  and  again,  to  get  prompt 
action,  that  these  be  located  in  Hono- 
lulu, where  lines  between  the  countries 
are  shortest.  That  is  an  explanation  as 
to  why  there  appears  to  be  undue  con- 
centration of  authority  between  meet- 
ings. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


33 


The  Report 

Your  Committee  on  Resolutions  here 
with    presents    four    resolutions    relative 
to  : 

1.  The  organization  of  a  permanent 
Pan-]  'untie  (  inference  : 

2.  Electrical  News  Service  in  and 
about    the    Pacific; 

3.  Defining  the  scope  of  the  activities 
of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Confer- 
ence : 

4.  Endorsing  the  Conference  to  Limit 
Armaments  and  to  consider  the 
problems  of  the  Pacific  and  the  Far 
East. 

Your  Committee  recommends  the 
adoption  of  these  resolutions. 

Lorrin    A.    Thurston, 
Chairman    Committee   on   Resoluions, 

Pan-Pacific     Press     Conference. 

Resolution  No.  1.  Concerning  the 
Organization  of  a  Permanent  Pan- 
Pacific   Press  Conference. 

Whereas,  representatives  of  the  press 
of  the  countries  in  and  bordering  upon 
the  Pacific  <  )cean  in  attendance  upon 
the  sessions  of  the  Press  Congress  of 
the  World  have  been  convened  and  are 
now  in  session  as  the  "Pan-Pacific  Press 
Conference"  for  the  consideration  of 
matters  of  special  concern  to  the  jour- 
nalism of  the    Pacific  regions: 

And  Whereas  the  formation  of  a  per- 
manent organization  of  representatives 
of  the  press  of  the  Pacific  will  promote 
the  purposes  for  which  this  Conference 
was  called  ;  provide  a  means  for  effectu- 
ating its  objects  and  desires;  give  pub- 
licity to  its  purposes  and  proceedings 
and  the  needs  of  the  Pacific  region  and 
furnish  a  medium  for  calling  and  hold- 
ing future  meetings  of  such  representa- 
tives : 

Status  of  Pax-Pacific  Union 
And    Whereas   the    Pan-Pacific    Union 
is    a   duly   incorporated   body,   organized 
under    the     law>    of    the    Territory    of 


Hawaii,  U.S.A.,  with  offices  in  Hono- 
lulu, having  an  international  Board  of 
Trustees  representing  the  principal  na- 
tions of  the  Pacific,  one  of  the  main 
objects  of  which  is  to  call  conferences 
of  delegates  from  Pacific  regions  to  dis- 
cuss  and  further  interest-;  common  to 
Pacific  peoples,  with  a  view  to  bringing 
them  into  closer  contact  and  more 
friendly  relations ; 

.hid  Whereas  the  said  Pan-Pacific 
Union  has  called  the  first  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Conference  with  the  approval  and 
cooperation  of  the  Press  Congress  of 
the  World,  and  has  financed  this  Confer- 
ence and  offers  its  services  in  carrying 
forward  recommendations  made  by  the 
Conference,  in  calling  further  Pan- 
Pacific  Conferences  at  such  times  and 
places  as  may  be  mutually  agreed  upon, 
when  so  requested  by  the  proper  officers 
of  the  same,  and  in  bringing  the  press 
men  of  the  Pacific  into  better  acquain- 
tanceship, cooperation,  correspondence 
and   communication  ; 

Be  I.t  Resolved,  that  the  members  of 
this  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  be 
md  hereby  are  organized  into  a  perma- 
nent body  to  be  known  as  the  "Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference,"  to  consist 
of  representatives  of  the  press  from  the 
countries  and  states  in  or  bordering  upon 
the  Pacific  Ocean ;  such  representatives 
to  be  appointed  upon  such  conditions,  in 
such  numbers  and  in  such  manner  as 
may  be  hereafter  decided  by  the  Gen- 
eral Committee  of  said  Conference  as 
hereinafter    indicated  : 

Powers  Vested  In  General  Com- 
mittee : 

Be  It  Further  Resolved,  that  all  of  the 
po\vers  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Confer- 
ence hereby  formed,  between  the  meet- 
ings of  same,  shall  be  vested  in  a  Gen- 
eral Committee,  consisting  of  not  less 
than  one  delegate  from  each  country  or 
state  now  represented  in  the  present 
Conference,   or  which   may   hereafter  be 


34 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


represented    therein;    who    shall    be   ap-  Term  of  Office 

pointed   by   the    President.  The    officers    and    members    of    said 

\r,,,lvlM,M    AN|)    functions   of  General  and  Executive  Committees  shall 

Executive  Committei  continue  to  hold  their  respective  offices 

...                         •  ,    ,  until    their    successors    are    duly    elected 

Except  as  herein  otherwise  provided,  . 

-    ,                       t  iL     /-          i   r  or   appointed, 

all  ot   the  powers  oi  the  General  Lorn-  ll 

mittee  shall  be  vested  in  an  Executive  Power  to  Amend  Terms  of 
Committee  of  three,  one  of  whom  shall  Organization 
be  the  President,  and  one  the  Secre-  The  members  of  the  General  Commit- 
tary.  The  Secretary  shall  also  act  as  tee  are  iiereby  authorized,  by  majority 
Treasurer  of  the  Conference,  of  the  Gen-  vote  between'  sessions  of  this  Confer- 
ral Committee  and  of  the  Executive  encej  to  amend  or  add  to  the  terms  of 
Committee.  organization    herein   expressed. 

For   purposes   of   convenience   of   ad-  Resolved:       That  the  members- of  the 

ministration  and  securing  promptness  of  pan-Pacinc  Press  Congress  pledge  them- 

action,     the     President     and     Secretary  seives    to    ur?e    upon    their    respective 

shall,    until    otherwise    ordered    by    the  o-OVernments  the  extreme  desirability  of 

Conference    or   the    General    Committee,  abolishing  the  requirement  for  passports 

he  residents  of  Honolulu,  Hawaii.  between  Pacific  countries;  and,  if  such 

Present  Executive  Committee  course  shall,  in  any  case,  be   found  in- 

The  members  of  the  Executive  Com-  advisable  for  the  present,  that  the  regu- 

mittee  are  hereby  declared  to  he:  lations   concerning   the   same   be   simpli- 

!  'resident ned   so   far  as  practicable ;  and   further, 

Secretary     that  charges  in  connection  with  the  issu- 

M ember -.  .  .  ance  of  such  passports  be  limited  to  the 

,r                     t       i-                        ii  original   fee   paid   at   the   time  of   issue. 

Vacancies    In    Committee — How  &                l 

Filled  Offer  of  Pan-Pacific  Union 

Vacancies   in   the   General   Committee  Accepted 

or  the    Executive  Committee,  caused  by  Be  It  Further  Resolved,  that  the  said 

death,    resignation,    disability    or    failure  offer  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  is  hereby 

to  act  for  the  space  of  one  year,  shall  accepted  with  the  sincere  thanks  of  this 

he  filled  by  appointment  by  the  Presi-  Conference. 

•  lent.  Regional  Section  of  World  Congress 

In  case  of  a  vacancy  in  the  office  of  Be  It  Further  Resok'ed,  that,  in  the 
1 'resident,  the  same  shall  be  filled  by  opinion  of  this  Pan-Pacific  Press  Con- 
vote  of  the  General  Committee.  ference,   it   will  be   in   the  best   interests 

Members  of  the  General  Committee  of  all  concerned  if  the  Pan-Pacific  Press 
representing  additional  countries  or  Conference  shall  act  as  and  be  a  perma- 
states  which  may  hereafter  join  said  nent  regional  section  of  the  Press  Con- 
Con  ference,  shall  he  appointed  by  the  gress  of  the  World,  representing  it  and 
President.  cooperating  with    it,    in   and   concerning 

(  >fficers  and  members  of  said  General  all   matters   appertaining  to   or   of   spe- 

and  Executive  Committees  shall  be  here-  cial  interest  to  the  countries  and  peoples 

after    elected    at    each    meeting    of    the  of  the  Pacific,  and  the  Executive  Com- 

Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference,  by  a  ma-  mittee  is  hereby  authorized  and  directed 

jority    vote    of    the    delegates    attending  to  make  such  arrangements  to  effectuate 

such    meeting.  this    suggestion    as    are    mutually    satis- 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


35 


factory  to  it  and  the  Press  Congress  of 
the  World. 

Meetings  of  the  Conference  shall  be 
called  by  the  President,  or  by  a  ma- 
jority of  the  Executive  Committee,  at 
such  times  and  places  as,  in  conference 
with  the  Pan-Pacific  Union,  may  be 
determined,  due  notice  thereof  being 
given  to  members  of  the  Conference. 
Appointments  Subject  to  Veto 
Every  appointment  herein  provided  to 
be  made  by  the  President,  shall,  when 
made,  be  immediately  reported  to  each 
member  of  the  General  Committee,  and 
shall  be  subject  to  revocation  and  the 
appointment  of  another  in  place  thereof, 
upon  a  vote  to  that  effect  by  a  majority 
of  the  General  Committee.  Until  such 
vote  is  received,  such  appointment  shall 
be  effective. 

Resolution  No.  2 — Electrical  News 
Service  In  and  About  the  Pacific 
Ocean. 

Whereas  news  dispatches  are  now 
transmitted  electrically  with  speed,  effi- 
ciency and  economy  between  certain 
countries  bordering  upon  the  Pacific 
Ocean ;  but  as  to  certain  other  countries, 
more  particularly  between  the  United 
States  on  the  one  hand  and  Japan,  New 
Zealand  and  Australia  on  the  other,  such 
service  is  neither  speedy,  efficient  nor 
economical ; 

It  is  hereby  declared  by  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Press  Conference  now  assem- 
bled in  the  City  of  Honolulu,  Territory 
of    Hawaii,    U.  S.  A. : 

That  ignorance  by  one  people  of  the 
character,  objects,  purposes,  doings  and 
intentions  of  other  peoples,  is  the  most 
prolific  cause  of  misunderstanding  and 
ill-feeling  between  such  peoples,  tending 
to  generate  suspicion  and  produce  fric- 
tion and  disagreement  and  is  therefore 
one    of    the    principal    causes    of    war. 

That  the  easiest,  quickest  and  best 
medium  for  dispelling  such  ignorance  is 
the    public    press ; 


That  the  day  has  passed  when  the 
mail  is  adequate  to  transmit  news  from 
one    country    to    another ; 

That  communication  from  one  country 
to  another  by  electric  telegraph,  cable 
or  wireless,  is  essential  to  that  full  and 
prompt  knowledge  of  what  is  transpiring 
in  the  various  countries  to  secure  in 
full  measure  the  benefits  incident  to  pub- 
licity. 

That  to  obtain  the  full  advantage  and 
benefits  of  such  electrical  transmission 
of  press  messages,  it  should  reach  all 
parts  of  the  civilized  world  by  the  short- 
est,   cheapest    and    quickest    routes ; 

That  such  service  around  and  across 
the  Pacific  Ocean  is,  as  to  some  portions 
thereof  inadequate  in  its  connections ; 
hampered  by  artificial  obstacles,  and  so 
expensive  as  to  be  prohibitive  of  the 
free  use  necessary  to  enable  the  press 
to  make  the  best  and  fullest  use  thereof; 

That  this  Conference  hereby  declares 
its  unqualified  conviction  that  prompt 
expansion  of  the  means  of  communica- 
tion to  all  parts  of  the  Pacific  and  ex- 
tension to  the  press  of  facilities  for 
cheap  unrestricted,  uncensored  and  un- 
controlled electrical  communication 
throughout  the  Pacific  will  be  a  most 
potent  influence  for  securing,  establish- 
ing and  maintaining  good  feeling,  good 
will  and  peace  between  the  peoples  of 
that  region,  and  thus  tend  to  a  satis- 
factory solution  of  the  chief  issue  now 
pending  before  the  nations. 

That  this  Conference  hereby  most 
heartily  commends  the  policy  under 
which  the  wireless  service  of  the  U.  S. 
Navy  is  now  transmitting  press  mes- 
sages between  certain  points  in  the  Pa- 
cific, at  a  low  rate  and  hereby  most 
urgently  recommends  that  such  service 
be  expanded  and  extended  to  all  parts 
of  the  Pacific  where  practicable ;  and 
that  the  charges  for  such  service  shall 
not  exceed  the  amounts  necessary  to 
make    such    service    self-supporting. 


36 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Thai  to  insure  the  full  and  adequate 
exchange  of  desirable  news  if  the  pur- 
es  ( >f  this  declaration  arc  to  be  as 
sured  it  is  necessary  that  means  be 
evolved  for  the  collection  of  news  in 
the  several  countries  affected  and  the 
same  exchanged  through  some  comi 
lium   mutually   agreed   upon  : 

That    such   news   having  been    so  col- 
d    it    is    highly    desirable    that    the 
^anic  should  so  far  as   reasonablj    prac- 
ticable,   he-    concentrated    at    a    com n 

center,  to  be  there  segregated  and    for 
warded  to  such  points  as  it   may  be  of 
interest.      Honolulu   is   recommended   as 
the  point  at   which  such  news  exchange 
should   be  located. 

That  this  Conference  therefore  most 
strenuously  urges  the  governments  and 
companies  owning  or  controlling  medi- 
ums of  electrical  communication  in  and 
aboul  the  Pacific  to  comply  with  the 
suggestions  and  recommendations  here 
in  contained  ; 

Thai  the  officers  of  this  Conference 
are  herein-  authorized  and  instructed  to 
take  all  necessary  or  proper  steps  to 
secure  the  action   herein  sought. 

Resolution      No.     3— Defining     the 
s(  ope    of    a(  tivities    of    the    i'.w- 
Pacifk    Press  (  Inference. 
Be  It  Resolved,  that  upon  the  perma- 
nent    organization    of    the     Pan-Pacific 
I  'iv-     i    inference,  among  other  matters 
which    it    ma)    properly    undertake,    the 
following  shall  he  considered  to  be  \\  ith- 
in    the    scope    of    the    activities    thereof, 
viz.  : 

1-     To    art    as    an    agency    for    inter- 
changing   among    the     newspapers     and 
;ixine>  . . f  the   Pacific  region  accurate 
information    aboul    the    peoples    of    the 
Pacific  and  their  problems. 

2.  To  arrange  future  conferences  of 
representatives  of  the  Pacific  press  to 
the  end  that  the  problems  incident  to 
the  work  of  the  press  of  the  Pacific 
region  shall  he  considered. 


3.  I  o  take  such  steps  as  are  neces- 
sary to  securing  cheaper  rates  and  more 
efficient  service  for  telegraph,  cable  am! 
wireless    messages. 

4.  To  entertain  representatives  of  the 
press  of  the  Pacific  a-  they  pass  through 
Honolulu,  thus  utilizing  the  opportunity 
afforded  for  spreading  the  Pan-Pacific 
spirit. 

5.  To  investigate  the  feasibility  of 
die  international  interchange  of  jour- 
nalists to  the  end  that  wider  contacts 
may  he  created  and  initiate  such  inter- 
change if  a  practical  plan  can  he  formed. 

6.  To  consider  the  practicability  of 
establishing  a  Pan-Pacific  school  of 
journalism  and  take  steps  to  bring  this 
aboul  if  feasible. 

7.  To  Collect  and  interchange  hlnis 
and  pictures  that  portray  accurately  the 
life  of  the  people. 

8.  To  assist  in  furthering  the  move- 
ment  anion-  Pacific  countries  of  the 
adoption  of  die  Roman  alphabet  and  of 
a   common   language. 

9.  To  take  such  steps  as  will  secure 
a  modification  of  the  ruling  of  the  ship- 
ping hoard,  recently  made,  which  for- 
bids passengers  on  a  foreign  boat  bound 
for  a  United  States  port  and  wishing  to 
stop  over  in  Honolulu,  from  resuming 
passage  on  a  boat  of  the  same  line.  This 
is  the  interpretation  given  the  regulation 
that  no  foreign  hoat  can  carry  passen- 
gers between  American  ports  and  work's 
a  hardship  upon  persons  coming  from 
foreign  ports  who  wish  to  stop  over  in 
Honolulu  to  attend  conferences  or  for 
other  purposes. 

Resolution    No.    4 — Concerning  the 

Limitation     op      Armaments  and 

Prohlems  of  the   Pacific  and  mm: 
Far  E  vst. 

Whereas,  the  delegates  of  the  daily, 
weekly  and  monthly  pres,s  of  the  coun- 
tries and  regions  bordering  the  Pacific 
having  been  convened  in  this  I 'an- Paci- 
fic   Press    Conference    for   the    consider- 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


37 


ation  of  questions  pertaining  particularly 
to  the   Pacific  regions : 

.  Ind  Whereas,  the  President  of  the 
United  States  has  invited  the  principal 
allied  and  associated  powers  to  partici- 
pate in  a  ci inference  on  the  limitation  ol 
armaments  and  on  the  problems  of  the 
Pacific  and  the  Far  East  : 

Therefore,  Be  It  Resolved,  that  we,  in 
conference  assembled,  do  warmly  com- 
mend the  President  of  the  United  States 
for  calling  what  may  prove  to  be  an 
epoch  making  conference  and  we  fur- 
ther commend  him  for  his  wisdom  in 
proposing  that  at  this  conference  an 
attempt  be  made  to  come  to  a  common 
understanding  with  respect  to  the  prin- 
ciples and  policies  which  shall  obtain 
m  the  Far  East.  Furthermore,  that  we 
instruct  the  officers  of  this  conference 
to  convey  by  cable  to  the  President  of 
the    United    States   this    resolution. 

Discussion   of   Resolution   No.   2 

Mark  Cohen:  I  would  net  like  this 
lution  to  include  the  word  •"ineffi- 
cient" as  applied  to  the  service  of  cable 
news  to  Australia  or  New  Zealand,  he- 
cause  in  my  humble  judgment  it  is  con- 
trary to  the  fact.  One  has  to  remember 
the  birth  and  growth  of  cable  communi- 
cations during  the  past  2?  year-.  Since 
then  there  have  been  great  develop- 
ments and  great  improvements  in  cable-. 
and  remembering,  as  I  do,  that  the  Pa- 
cific cable  is  owned  by  Great  Britain, 
and  the  several  countries  of  Australia 
and  New  Zealand  and  Canada,  forming 
a  federation  who  have  been  able  out  of 
its  profits  to  put  aside  large  sums  of 
money  in  order  to  secure  better  service, 
and  remembering  further  that  the  <  rreat 
Imperial  Conference  of  1909-  committed 
itself  to  this  declaration  of  policy  that 
50  soon  as  the  system  of  wireless  had 
progressed  sufficiently  as  to  make  it 
reliable  and  dependable  that  the  govern- 
ments of  those  countries  should  be  asked 


to  consider  the  practicability  of  furnish- 
ing a  chain  of  imperial  communications 
by  wireless  around  the  globe ;  and  remem- 
bering that  an  important  delegation, 
again  headed  by  Canada,  the  moving 
spirit  ill  this  matter,  went  to  Mr.  As- 
quith,  Premier  of  Great  Britain,  and 
put  that  view  of  the  case  before  him. 
and  induced  him.  by  solid  argument,  to 
entertain  the  view  that  the  day  of  wire- 
less was  quickly  coming;  I  venture  to 
say  in  view  of  all  this  that  but  for  the 
unfortunate  great  war,  a  chain  of  wire- 
less, assisted  by  that  great  genius  of 
wireless.  Marconi,  would  have  been  in 
existence  today.  1  understand  that  that 
very   thing   is   now   being   evolved. 

Since  the  press  of  New  Zealand  and 
Australia  depend  on  London  for  the 
major  supply  of  their  news,  everything 
has  been  done  to  make  that  news  re- 
liable and  thoroughly  representative  of 
that  from  which  it  emanates.  Anyone 
who  has  seen  the  Sydney  "Morning 
Herald"  or  the  Melbourne  "Argus"  or 
my  own  country  papers  of  today,  will 
remember  the  advance  that  is  given  to 
world  wide  events,  will  say  with  me  that 
the  service  is  dependent,  reliable  and 
efficient,  and  far  cheaper,  having  re- 
card  to  all  circumstances  of  the  case. 
1  recognize  and  freely  accord  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  credit  for 
what  it  has  done  in  the  matter  of  estab- 
lishing a  service  with  which  at  all  events 
you  Americans  are  thoroughly  well  satis- 
fied, but  you  must  have  some  regard 
for  the  traditions  of  these  countries 
which  has  a  monopoly  of  utilities — the 
countries  that  we  are  looking  to  for 
help  and  assistance,  and  we  cannot  run 
counter  to  their  wishes.  If  there  is 
a  clearing  house  established  in  the  Pa- 
cific, I  hope  it  may  be  established  here. 
1  hope  to  see  the  day  come  when  all 
sensational  items  are  suppressed  a-  yi  n 
would  the  plague.  We  want  news,  al 
lutely    reliable    news,    and    nothing    else. 


38 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


We  don't  want  sensationalism.  We  don'1 
want  items  about  the  decision  of  200 
or  300  school  children  as  to  whether 
they  will  wear  short  frocks  and  expose 
part  of  their  anatomy  to  the  gaze  of  the 
public.     We  call  that  "piffle." 

You  must  give  us  some  credit  as 
pioneers  in  this  work,  for  having  done 
what  we  tried  to  do.  We  intend  to  go 
on  establishing  wireless  where  we  can, 
having  thought  for  the  enterprise  and 
press  of  <>ur  country,  and  we  ask  you 
Americans,  especially  you  here,  to 
second  our  efforts  and  see  when  the 
time  comes  that  we  are  supplied  with 
news  quickly,  that  is  thoroughly  re- 
liable,  thoroughly  wholesome  and  thor- 
oughly  dependable.     (Applause.) 

Mr.  Tii  i  rston  :  I  wish  to  say  a 
word  of  explanation  on  the  point  con- 
cerning which  Air.  Cohen  has  addressed 
the  conference.  Far  be  it  from  the 
Committee  to  intend,  or  attempt  to  ig- 
nore the  news  service  which  is  going 
to  Australia  from  the  south,  by  cable. 
This  question  has  been  given  more  con- 
sideration by  the  Committee  than  any 
other  point  that  came  before  it.  The 
statements  which  have  been  made  here, 
and  which  have  called  forth  the  criti- 
cism from  the  gentleman  were  based  on 
information  received  by  the  delegates 
from  New  Zealand,  Australia,  and 
Hong  Kong,  in  addition  to  the  informa- 
tion furnished  by  the  chief  of  the  wire- 
station  in  Honolulu.  The  delegate 
here  from  Hong  Kong  stated  to  us  that 
the  news  they  received  in  Hong  Kong 
came  to  them  not  direct  but  by  way  of 
London— telegraphed  across^  the  world 
to  London  and  then  relayed  to  Hong 
Kong.  That  does  nol  seem  to  be  effi- 
cient or  economical  and  I  have  therefore 
characterized  thai  as  being  a  part  of  the 
service  that  is  inefficient  and  un-eco- 
nomical.  (  hie  of  the  delegates  from  New 
Zealand  stated  to  the  Committee  that  on 
the  way  here  from  New  Zealand,  up  to 


the  day  before  they  reached  Honolulu, 
he  was  able  to  send  messages  for  4J/2d 
or  9  cents  a  word,  and  that  the  day  after 
he  got  here  he  attempted  to  send  a  mes- 
sage and  was  told  he  could  not  send  it. 
but  was  referred  to  the  cable  office 
where  he  was  told  he  could  only  send 
a  message  at  75  cents  a  word.  His 
message  had  to  be  cabled  to  San  Fran- 
cisco, telegraphed  to  Victoria,  and  from 
Canada  cabled  back  to  New  Zealand. 
That  did  not  seem  efficient  or  economi- 
cal to  the  Committee — in  fact,  it  seemed 
a   prohibitive   condition   of   affairs. 

Again,  the  local  Committee,  before  the 
Congress  assembled  here,  took  the  mat- 
ter up  with  the  Navy  wireless  station, 
which  receives  wireless  news  service  in 
Honolulu,  and  asked  if  it  would  not  be 
practicable  to  make  this  the  center  of  a 
special  wireless  at  uniform  rates.  It 
appealed  to  him  immensely  and  he  said 
he  would  take  it  up  and  see  what  could 
be  done.  He  stated  it  was  physically 
possible  to  make  contact  with  Japan, 
but  that  the  regulations  did  not  permit 
him  to  send  messages  to  Japan.  He 
stated  that  it  was  feasible  for  the  radio 
station  here  to  transmit  messages,  as 
far  as  he  knew,  to  New  Zealand  and 
Australia,  but  that  was  not  being  done, 
and  that  he  would  ascertain  why  not, 
and  he  communicated  with  Washington 
and  later  informed  us  that  it  could  not 
be  done. 

We  are  in  daily  communication  with 
Samoa,  and  the  Fijis.  The  cable  from 
Samoa  and  Fiji  can  transmit  messages 
to  Australia  and  New  Zealand,  but  it 
cannot  be  done  because  of  a  contract  be- 
tween the  cable  company  coming  to 
New  Zealand  and  Australia  from  the 
south,  by  which  these  countries  are  pro- 
hibited from  receiving  telegraphic  or 
wireless  except  over  their  cable  over 
a  term  of  years,  except  from  the  sea. 
That  was  why  the  delegate  was  able  to 
send    messages    up   to   the   night    before 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


39 


he  landed  from  the  steamer.  He  was 
prohibited  from  sending  messages  from 
our  local  office  because  of  the  contract 
between  New  Zealand  and  Australia 
and  that  cable  company.  That  did  not 
seem  to  be  efficient  or  economical,  when 
it  is  within  the  possibilities  of  the  wire- 
less to  transmit  such  message  at  a  cost 
not  exceeding  9  cents  a  word,  and  the 
delegate  had  to  pay  75  cents  a  word. 

We  recognize  that  the  communica- 
tions  which  the  gentleman  spoke  of  by 
way  of  the  southern  cable,  and  also 
from  Canada,  is  an  immense  advance 
over  the  previous  conditions  when  there 
was  no  cable.  We  recognize  that  the 
governments  and  companies  in  that  con- 
nection, which  the  honorable  gentleman 
has  mentioned,  looked  forward  to  the 
time  when  wireless  was  coming,  and 
now  we  feel  that  the  time  has  arrived 
when  there  are  physical  means  by  which 
that  communication  can  be  cheapened 
and  made  far  more  efficient,  so  that 
countries  across  the  waters  from  the 
United  States  and  each  other  can  get 
into  communication,  and  it  should  be 
recognized  by  this  Conference,  and  they 
should  exercise  their  influence,  so  far  as 
practicable,  to  get  wireless  put  into  op- 
eration  as   promptly   as   possible. 

As  to  the  cost,  I  was  told  by  Mr. 
McClatchy,  Director  of  the  Associated 
Press,  that  the  present  service  being  con- 
ducted by  the  Navy  wireless  will  cost 
only  6  cents  a  word  from  San  Francisco 
to  the  Philippines,  and  practically  the 
same  to  Japan.  The  present  service  to 
Japan  is  sent  by  wireless  to  Guam,  taken 
20  mlies  across  the  Island  and  then 
cabled  to  Japan ;  three  charges  for  the 
one  message — in  addition  to  the  delay. 
There  is  no  reason,  except  artificial  ob- 
stacles which  have  been  interposed,  why 
the  message  could  not  go  direct  from 
San  Francisco  to  Japan  in  the  twinkling 
of  an  eye,  at  the  rate  of  6  cents  a  word. 
The  Chairman  told  me  only  yesterday  it 


was  incredible  to  him  that  such  a  serv- 
ice could  be  obtained  and  yet  was  not 
available.  It  is  not  our  object  to  con- 
demn any  service  of  any  country,  but  to 
set  forth  the  fact  that  this  cheaper  and 
more  efficient  service  is  to  be  had,  and 
to  make  a  declaration  on  our  part  that 
we  favor  putting  that  cheaper  service 
into  operation  as  soon  as  possible. 

Mr.  McClatchy:  May  I  supple- 
ment what  Mr.  Thurston  has  said  by 
another  concrete  example.  I  was  told 
by  the  editor  of  the  "Nippu  Jiji"  that 
his  cabled  news  or  wireless  received 
from  Japan  here  in  Honolulu  cost  him 
26Yi  cents  per  word,  and  that  a  similar 
charge  would  be  made  from  here  to 
Japan.  The  Navy  wireless,  as  you  have 
been  told,  is  sending  news  all  the  way 
from  San  Francisco  to  Cavite,  for  6 
cents,  and  is  prepared  to  send  from 
San  Francisco  to  Japan  for  6  cents  a 
word,  with  the  cooperation  of  Japan, 
and  between  San  Francisco  and  Hono- 
lulu and  Honolulu  and  Manila,  the  rate 
is  less.  It  is  obvious  that  the  journal- 
ists of  Japan  are  losing  not  only  money 
but  a  great  advantage  in  the  opportunity 
for  an  extended  news  service  which 
would  be  of  value  there  and  here. 

Col.  Lawson  :  I  think  I  can  explain 
in  a  few  words  the  position  of  the 
British  Empire  in  regard  to  this  system, 
and  I  think  I  can  make  the  apparent 
difficulties  quite  clear,  if  I  should  be  al- 
lowed to  do  so.  The  object  of  the 
British  Empire  scheme  of  establishing 
and  improving  the  system  of  communi- 
cations is  this — they  are  endeavoring  to 
put  their  communications  on  a  sound 
commercial  basis,  and  at  every  station 
they  are  endeavoring  to  establish,  it  is 
intended  to  be  a  commercial  one, 
whether  operated  by  private  companies 
or  endeavor.  It  is  meant  to  be  com- 
mercial and  permanent,  therefore  I 
don't  think  it  is  quite  fair  to  compare 
it    with    the    facilities    which    the    U.    S. 


40 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


\av\  Department  can  put  at  the  dis- 
posal of  the  public  for  communications 
in  the  Pacific.  While  not  wishing  to 
depreciate  in  any  way  the  value  of  that 
service,  1  should  like  to  point  out  that 
it  is  only  a  temporar)  expedient — unless 
the  sanction  is  renewed,  it  will  be  void 
on  1 11 1  \  22nd  next,  and  might  be  void 
at  any  moment  for  strategic  or  other 
reasons.  Therefore  I  do  not  think  it 
quite  fair  to  blame  any  part  of  the 
British  Empire  for  failing  to  fall  in 
with  what  is  only  a  temporary  expedi- 
ent. 

Dr.  Pierson  was  over  in  London  this 
summer,  endeavoring  to  arrange  these 
questions  of  communication  in  conjunc- 
tion with  our  government.  I  have  no 
doubl  but  that  if  this  service  which  is 
now  operating  was  operated  on  a  perma- 
nent commercial  basis,  it  would  be  pos- 
sible   to    make    some    arrangement    with 


tin.-  cable  companies  of  New  Zealand  and 
Australia  and  sec  that  the  difficulties 
Mr.  Thurston  speaks  of  do  not  exist. 
I  think  that  this  is  the  position  as  re- 
gards the  British  Empire.  It  is  not  be- 
cause the}  arc  not  doing  their  best  to 
improve  the  system  of  communications, 
not  only  by  cable  but  by  wifeless  by  all 
means  in  their  power,  hut  because  they 
.are  endeavoring  to  get  a  permanent 
solution  of  the  problem,  and  that  will 
take  a   very    long  time. 

As  soon  as  the  wireless  chain  is  estab- 
lished, there  will  he  a  high-powered  sta- 
tion in  Australia,  and  that  will  he  the 
time  lor  entering  into  these  arrange- 
ments in  the  Pacific,  which  will  make 
arrangements  to  perfect  things  all 
through.  I  think  that  explains  why  our 
plans  as  they  now  stand  do  not  fall  in 
which  the  temporary  wireless  arrange- 
ment   in   operation   now. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


41 


A   Resolution   of  Thanks   to   the    News   Agencies    Passed 
by   the   Pan-Pacific   Press   Conference 


After  resuming  the  chair  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  afternoon  session,  Mr. 
Alexander  I  tume  Ford  stated  that  the 
last  business  of  the  Pan- 1'acihc  Press 
Conference  session,  which  would  like- 
wise formally  conclude  the  official  pro- 
gram of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World,  should  be,  he  felt,  an  expression 
of  hearty  appreciation  to  the  various 
news  agencies  which  had  contributed 
so  signally  to  the  success  of  the  con- 
ference, both  by  their  comprehensive 
news  reports  of  world  events  brought 
to  1  lawaii  during  the  session,  and  by 
the  notable  wide  service  over  the  world 
given  to  the  Conference  through  these 
agencies  and  their  correspondents.  I  [e 
proposed  a  vote  of  thanks  to  the 
agencies  individually  and  collectively 
for  their  sympathetic  attitude  in  pro- 
moting a  better  understanding  through 
the  communication  of  news  and  also 
for  the,  technical  excellence  with  which 
the  United  States  Radio  News  Service 
had  carried  the  dispatches.  The  four 
agencies  specified  are : 


The  Associated  Press,  which  aug- 
mented its  daily  reports  to  1  lawaii 
newspapers  with  a  special  1,000  word 
report. 

The  Chicago  Tribune  Syndicate 
Service,  which  established  especially  for 
the  period  of  the  sessions  of  the  Press 
Congress  of  the  World,  a  3,000  word 
daily  news  report,  which  it  collected 
in  its  Chicago  office  from  foreign  news 
dispatches  gathered  in  all  parts  of  the 
world. 

The  United  Press,  which  sent  a  fifty 
word  dispatch   daily. 

The  United  States  Nayy  Radio  which 
made  special  arrangements  to  handle 
incoming  and  outgoing  news  as  well  as 
placing  the  daily  news  report  at  the 
disposal  of  the  delegates  at  the  Press 
Congress  headquarters. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  repre- 
sentative correspondents  of  other  news- 
papers and  news  agencies  were  com- 
mended for  their  interest  in  sending 
out  complete   reports  of  the  sessions. 

The  chairman's  proposal  was  carried 
unanimously    by    a    viva    voce    vote. 


42 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Election   of  the  Executive  Committee   of   the   Pan-Pacific 

Press   Conference 


Mr.    Zumoto:     That     concludes     the 
lutions  which  have  been  under  prep- 
aration. 

We  have  now  the  appointment  of 
officers  for  this  body,  first,  1 'resident. 
Secretary  and  one  member — these  three 
sets  of  nominations  are  now  before  the 
meeting.  I  first  call  for  the  nomination 
for  President.  Will  somebody  make  a 
nomination  ? 

Mr.  McClatchy:  Mr.  Chairman. 
Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  Assuming  that 
the  invitation  of  Chairman  Zumoto  for 
me  to  act  as  Honorary  Secretary  does 
not  disenfranchise  me.  I  would  like  to 
offer  a  nomination  for  the  responsihle 
position  i<\  President.  If  this  Confer- 
ence  is  going  to  accomplish  anything, 
there  musl  be  at  the  head  of  it  a  man  of 
executive  force  and  ability,  and  we  who 
have  come  here  from  various  parts  of 
the  globe,  and  have  traveled  around  for 
five  or  six  days,  and  have  been  in  con- 
ference for  five  or  six  days  more,  will, 
I  think,  agree  that  we  could  not  select  a 
man  better  fitted  for  that  position  than 
Mr.  I..  A.  Thurston.     |  Applause 

I  see  from  the  sentiments  expressed  I 
need  say  nothing  further,  and  will  leave 
the  nomination  with  the  simple  mention 
of  his  name.     (  Applause.  I 

Mr.  R.  1 1.  \i  i  kx  :  I  would  like  to 
iid  the  nomination  of  M  r.  Thursfc  mi 
and  say  that  those  of  us  who  have  been 
associated  with  him  in  entertaining  the 
delegates  know  the  degree  of  enthusiasm 
In-  will  carry  into  the  office  of  President 
of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference, 
and  it  is  with  great  pleasure  that  1 
second  the  nomination. 


Mr.  Zumoto:     It  is  very  obvious  to 

everybody  that  a  vote  need  not  be  taken, 
hut  to  make  everything  regular,  I  will 
now  put  it  to  the  vote.  Those  in  favor 
of  this  nomination  please  say  "Aye." 
Nobody  is  opposed  to  it.  so  Mr.  Thurs- 
ton is  unanimously  elected  President  of 
this  new  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 
body. 

Mr.  Thurston:  I  thank  you.  Ladies- 
and  gentlemen,  for  the  honor.  I  will  trj 
to  do  my  best  to  answer  the  call  of  duty 
and  carry  out  the  objects  of  this  Con- 
ference to  the  best  of  my  ability. 

Mr.  Zumoto:  The  next  office  to  be 
filled  is  that  of  Secretary.  Will  some- 
body propose  a  name? 

Mr.  Innes:  Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies 
and  Centlemen :  I  have  very  much 
pleasure  in  moving  that  Dr.  Bunker  he 
appointed  Executive  Secretary  of  the 
Pan- Pacific  Congress.  All  of  us  have 
come  into  close  personal  contact  with 
Dr.  Bunker  since  we  have  been  here. 
We  have  found  him  courteous  to  a  de- 
gree, hut  that  courtesy  has  never  de- 
generated into  softness  where  his  execu- 
tive ability  was  called  upon.  The  dig- 
nity of  this  organization  will  be  very 
great  indeed.  It  has  already  at  the 
head  of  it  a  most  capable  President.  I 
think  that  if  he  is  aided  by  such  a 
Secretary  as  Dr.  Bunker  there  can  be 
no  doubt  whatever  that  this  assembly  of 
Sons  of  the  Morning  will  spread  its 
lighl  throughout  the  whole  Pacific  and 
to  the  lands  beyond  the  sea.  I  have  very 
much  pleasure  in  moving  that  Dr. 
Bunker  be  appointed  Executive  Secre- 
tary.    (Applause.) 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


43 


Mr.  .Zumoto:  There  seems  to  be  no 
necessity  to  take  a  vote  on  this  nomi- 
nation of  Dr.  Frank  F.  Bunker  as  Sec- 
retary. Those  in  favor,  say  "Aye."  Dr. 
Bunker  is  unanimously  elected  Secretary. 
(Applause.) 

Another  nomination  must  be  made  to 
fill  the  list  of  executive  officers  and 
members  of  the  executive  body.  Will 
somebody  make  a  nomination  ? 

Mr.  Petrie:  Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies 
and  Gentlemen :  For  the  post  of  mem- 
ber of  this  very  important  committee,  I 
have    great    pleasure    in    proposing    Mr. 


Soga,  Editor  of  the  Nippu  Jiji,  of  this 
city.  Mr.  Soga  is  known  to  most  of  us 
here.  He  is  a  distinguished  journalist 
and  citizen  of  Honolulu,  and  in  every 
way  he  is  well  qualified  for  the  position 
of  member.  Further,  I  think  his  ap- 
pointment would  give  an  international 
Pan-Pacific  touch  to  the  constitution  of 
this  committee,  which  I  think  is  to  be 
desired.     (Applause.) 

Mr.  Zumoto:  As  a  fellow  country- 
man of  Mr.  Soga,  it  is  with  great  pleas- 
ure I  have  heard  this  nomination.  Will 
somebody  second  it?  Those  in  favor 
say  "Aye."     (Carried.) 


44 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Pan-Pacific   Cable   News   Service 


By  T.  PetriE, 
Editor,  South  China  Morning  Post,  Hongkong 


"Tell  them  we  wain  a  broader,  bigger 
brighter  and  better  cable  news  service." 
That    was  the   last   injunction    I    received 
"ii  leaving  Hongkong  to  attend  this  con- 
e. 
Hitherto  the  position  has  not  been  sat- 
ctory.     I  [ongkong  is  tied  to   Reuter, 
Manila   to   the   Associated    Press,  Tokyo 
to    ECokusia.     No  agency  treads  on   the 
Lind  of  another,  and  costs  are  far  too 
high    for  the  development   of   individual 
enterprise.    Shanghai,  on  the  other  hand, 
is  a  dumping  ground   for  many  services, 
ter  is  the  chief  ingredient  of  a  con- 
1   nia^s  of  intelligence  landed  there, 
bul  the  lump  is  leavened  by  smatterings  of 
American  and   French  wireless,  and  sup- 
plemented   by    liberal    doses   of    Russian 
and  German  information  of  doubtful  or- 
igin and  authenticity.     It   is  not  an  ideal 
dish,   but,   in   such   a   mixed   community. 
n  ibably  meets  with  more  acceptani  e 
than  any  single  agency  service  could  pos 
sibJ  mand. 

What    we  should   aim   at   is   the   ideal 

dish. 

Reuter,  as  a    British  agency,   features 

British  news  and  views.  The  Associated 

aters  for    American  readers,  while 

Kokusai,  which  I  believe  is  a  camouflaged 

Reuter   offshoot,    is    intended    solely    for 

imption.     Xo!  one  of  th 
big  •  agencies   deals,   except   in   the 

Lshion,  with  the  news  which 
ask,  the  news  of  the  coun- 
tries bordering  the  Pacific.  They  tell  us 
of  happenings,  mainly  political,  in  Lon- 
don, Paris,  Washington,  but  seldom  do 
the)  enlightenment    as   to   what    is 

transpiring  in  those-  vasl  territories  which 


border  the  Pacific,  the  peoples  of  which 
comprise  one-third  of  the  population  of 
the  globe.  They  tell  us  little  or  nothing 
about  our  immediate  neighbors,  and  it 
follows  that  such  news  as  we  get,  pre- 
sented as  it  is  in  different  ways  in  dif- 
ferent countries,  is  not  conducive  to 
good  understanding.  Errors  creep  in, 
even  falsehoods,  and  friction  results. 
This  is  perhaps  the  chief  disadvantage  of 
the  present  system,  or  lack  of  system. 

Some  months  ago  I  received  a  letter 
from  Mr.  Ford,  director  of  the  Pan-Pa- 
cific Union,  in  which  he  suggested  Ho- 
nolulu as  a  center  for  the  collection  and 
mination  of  news  to  ami  from  the 
Pacific.  Herein  lies  an  opportunity  for 
the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  to  step 
in  and  to  perform  a  real  service  not  only 
to  pressdom  but  to  the  reading  public  of 
Pacific  lands.  Benjamin  Franklin  des- 
cribed the  press  as  "the  mistress  of  intelli- 
gence." It  behooves  us  to  guard  that 
title.  To  be  worthy  of  the  dignity  it  im- 
plies, it  is  imperative  that  the  press  of  the 
Pacific  should  move  with  the  times.  The 
war  has  altered  many  things.  It  has 
broadened  the  outlook  of  millions.  No 
longer  are  we  satisfied  with  news  from 
the  homeland  alone,  the  news  which  in 
days  gone  by  came  like  water  to  thirst}' 
souls.  We  want  to  be  fully  informed  of 
current  events  in  other  lands,  and  chiefly 
want  to  know  and  become  acquainted 
with  our  neighbors.  We  want  to  get  to- 
gether and  to  understand  each  other. 
Then  we  must  give  a  thought  to  the 
wants  of  the  native  elements  who  sur- 
1  lis.  The  foreign  press  is  an  mi- 
nt  factor  in  bringing  enlightenment 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


45 


to  many  millions  of  races  who  are  just 
beginning  to  interest  themselves  in  the 
doings  of  the  western  world.  The  num- 
bers of  native  readers  of  the  foreign 
press  in  China,  Japan,  Malaya  and  else- 
where on  the  Pacific  are  increasing  by 
leaps  and  bounds,  and  no  progressive 
'newspaper  can  afford  to  ignore  their 
wants. 

It  should  be  possible  for  us  to  organize 
a  liberal  and  inexpensive  yet  thoroughly 
reliable  and  acceptable  general  news  ser- 
vice  for  the   Pacific. 

A  broader  service — a  service  of  world- 
wide scope  and  outlook,  a  service  which 
as  far  as  possible  will  reveal  both  sides  of 
the  picture  at  the  same  time. 

A  bigger  service — a  service  which  will 
not  be  restricted  by  the  terms  of  a  con- 
tract yielding  so  many  words  for  so  many 
dollars,  a  service  always  as  big  as  the 
event  recorded  warrants. 

A  brighter  service — a  service  which 
will  deal  much  more  liberally  with  the 
happy  side  of  international  affairs  and 
much  less  liberally  with  the  petty  woes 
and  worries  which  torment  humanity. 

A  better  service — a  service  of  real 
live  news  and  news  only,  a  service  which 
will  not  attempt*  in  any  way  to  influence 
the  minds  of  the  writers  who  may  have 
to  handle  it. 

Surely  between  us  we  can  provide  a 
service  on  these  lines.  A  central  organi- 
zation will  be  needed  to  collect  and  dis- 
tribute the  news.  I  can  think  of  no  bet- 
ter center  than  Honolulu,  the  hub  of  the 
Pacific.    Here  we  alreadv  have  the  nucle- 


us  of  the  organization  and  the  willingness 
to  work.  This  great  Pacific  ('able 
News  Service  will  need  a  staff  and  a 
number  of  correspondents.  The  cost  will 
be  heavy,  but  as  a  setoff  there  will  soon 
be  heavy,  but  as  a  set-off  there  should 
soon  arise  a  demand  for  Pacific  news 
from  our  organization,  which  news  will 
be  supplied  by  and  credited  to  its  re- 
spective contributors.  Telegraphic 
charges  will  be  the  main  item  of  cost, 
but  it  will  be  the  duty  of  our  organ- 
ization to  continually  presn  for  reduc- 
tion. By  ceaseless  agitation  we  can. 
I  am  sure,  obtain  both  cheap  and  bet- 
ter telegraphic  facilities  than  we  have 
hitherto  had.  With  wireless  and  the 
submarine  cable  competing  for  our  busi- 
ness— they  are  bound  to  do  this  in  time 
— such  a  news  service  as  I  have  outlined 
can  be  organized  and  operated  with  bene- 
fit to  all  concerned.  Better  served,  the 
press  can  do  much  to  tone  down  and  even 
dispel  the  many  misunderstandings  and 
jealousies  which  afflict  the  cosmopolitan 
communities  bordering  the  Pacific.  Some 
members  of  the  Conference  may  consider 
a  Pacific  cable  news  service  such  as  I 
have  outlined  in  advance  of  the  times. 
but  those  members  who  have  resided  in 
the  East  for  a  number  of  years  cannot 
fail  to  appreciate  and  approve  the  mo- 
tive which  has  inspired  the  idea.  A  big 
change  in  the  collection  and  distribution 
of  cable  news  must  come  sooner  or 
later,  and  it  will  be  well  to  prepare,  for 
much  water  will  flow  under  the  bridge 
before  such  a  get-together  opportunity 
as  this  gathering  offers  occurs  again. 


46  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Trans-Pacific   News   Communication 


V.  S.  McClatchy 
Director   Associated   Press 

The    most     important    subject    which  The  work  of  the  Press  Congress  of 

can  be  offered   for  consideration  of  the  the    World,     and     of     the     Pan-Pacific 

I  'ress    Congress   of    the    World    at    this  Union,   so   far  as   this  question   is   con- 

time  is  reliable  international   news  com-  cerned,  may  now  be  confined  to  insur- 

inunication.      Only    through    such    com-  ing    continuance    of    the     facilities    al- 

munication   can    we   dissipate   ignorance,  ready   established,   and   to   inducing  co- 

and      prevent      the      misunderstandings  operation  of  other  countries  on  the  Pa- 

which  create  suspicion  and  distrust,  and  cific,  so  as  to  extend  and  broaden  those 

serve  as  forerunners  and  causes  of  war.  facilities  and  secure  the  greatest  possi- 

This    subject    is    of    more    immediate  bIe  general   benefit   therefrom. 

importance      than      disarmament      even.  The  most  effective  plan   for  expedit- 

since    no    nation    is    justified    in    laying  ing  freight  transportation  for  long  dis- 

aside    the    weapons    of    defense    upon  tances  is  to  provide  a  canal  on  which 

which     the    nation's    life    may    depend,  any  one  may  operate  carrier  boats  for 

until    assured    by    knowledge    of    senti-  a  nominal  fee.     The  most  effective  plan 

ment  and   conditions   in   other   countries  for  securing  reliable  international  news 

that    weapons   are    no    longer   needed.  communication    is    to    provide    facilities 

•ri      r>       -n     -c     tt  •       i         1            -j.  for  accurate  and   rapid  transmission  of 

I  he  ran-Pacinc   Union  has  shown  its  r       .     .           , 

r   ,.                               r   ^1  •  news   reports,  at   a  nominal   word   rate, 

appreciation    of   the    importance   of   this  ,    .     l       .          ,     .....                 f 

,            c   .        .,     ,                          ,  and  throw  those  facilities  open  for  use 

matter  by  confining  its  tentative  agenda  .                 .  .                         .     .   1          ,  .    ,. 

f       .,                     ~                      .,        °,  .  by  reputable  news  associations  and  mdi- 

tor  tlie  present   Congress  to  the  subiect  ..      ,                              , 

c     ,<n                   ,.     ,,     .        .,_             .  vidual  newspapers,  the  news  reports  to 

ol        Communication       in     its     various  .    ,          ,           r         , 

,  i              rp,                                  ,         ,    .  be   independent,    free    from   government 

phases.      1  he  papers  prepared,  and  thus  -1                       .  .             b    .  A    ,     . 

„  •   ,    ,     ,                             ,1          ,  .  control    or    censorship,    unassisted    by 

lai    printed,    however,   treat   the   subiect  ...                     .         \l                .             J 

oc.   n   „     ,  ,                 ,      ,          ,      n-  subsidy,  and  to  be  self-supporting. 

as   a    problem   unsolved,   and   offer   sug-  .    •x'                      .    ,        ,               ?.  . 

gestions   for  solutions.  Those    are    Preclsely    the    conditions 

which  now  exist  for  trans-Pacific  news 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  solution  of  communication  in  certain  districts,  and 
the  problem  of  trans-Pacific  news  com-  which  may  be,  and  should  be  extended 
munication  was  presented  by  me  over  to  all  countries  bordering  on  this  ocean. 
two  years  ago,  and  was  adopted  by  With  the  example  of  a  system  of  the 
Congress  over  a  year  ago,  and  the  plan  kind  successfully  operating  on  the  Pa- 
has  been  in  successful  operation  since,  cific,  it  will  be  a  question  of  time  only 
Today,  the  people  of  China,  and  Japan,  when  the  balance  of  the  world  will  in- 
and  the  Philippines,  and  Hawaii,  and  sist  on  enjoying  similar  advantages. 
the  United  States,  are  finding  their  A  brief  statement  of  communication 
vision  broadened  and  their  misunder-  conditions  on  the  Pacific,  with  the  de- 
standings  disappearing,  through  the  in  tail  of  the  plan  and  its  operation,  will 
fluence  of  an  extended,  uncensored  daily  be  found  in  an  article  written  by  me 
news   report.  for    "Editor    and    Publisher"    of    New 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE.  47 

York,  the  issue  of  March  12,  1921.    The  on  the  theory  that  if  the  plan  did  not 

investigation  made  by   Congress  in  the  work    successfully,    such    power    should 

matter,  is  covered  in  transcript  of  hear-  not    continue,    while    if    the    method    of 

ings    held    in    September    and    October,  communication  proved   successful,  Con- 

1919,    before   the    radio    sub-committees  gress    would    undoubtedly    extend    the 

of  the  Senate  Naval  Affairs  Committee,  authorization. 

and  the  House  Committee  on  Merchant  Newg    reportg    haye    been    transmitted 

Marine  and  Fisheries.  across  the  padfk  under  that  plan  since 

For  present  purposes,   it   will    suffice  January,     1920.      At    first,    there    were 

to    say,    that    Congress   passed    in   June  many  difficulties,  and  shortcomings,  but 

1920  a  resolution,  authorizing  the  Navy  they  have  been  gradually  overcome.     In- 

Department    to    use    its    radio    facilities  stallation   of   high   power   machines   and 

for  two  years   for  news  communication  improved  sending  and  receiving  appara- 

under  certain  conditions ;  that  the  Navy  tus,    have    trebled    the    speed,    and    now 

Department  made  a  rate  per  word   for  enable   San    Francisco   to   receive   direct 

news    transmission    across    the    Pacific,  from  Cavite  without  relay.     Three  inde- 

San  Francisco  to  Cavite   (near  Manila)  pendent  daily  reports  now  go  westward 

of   six  cents  per  word,  the  lowest  rate  from  San   Francisco — that  of  the  Asso- 

for  long  distance  transmission  of  inde-  dated    Press,    1100   words;    the    United 

pendent  news  reports  in  the  world ;  that  Press,   about   500   words,   and   a   special 

the    Navy    radio    in    this    matter,    acts  report     for     the     Japan     Advertiser     of 

practically    as    a    common    carrier,    and  Tokyo ;   while  special   correspondents  of 

that  news  reports  thus  transmitted,  are  some  American  newspapers  use  the  new 

not    subject    to    government    control    or  radio   to    a    limited    extent    for    sending 

censorship.  news    from    the    Far   East.     The   Asso- 

This  authorization  was  granted  in  the  ciated  Press  rePort  is  used  at  Honolulu 
face  of  pronounced  opposition  from  hY  English  and  Japanese  newspapers, 
radio  corporations,  and  notwithstanding  and  at  Manila  bX  English  and  vernacu- 
a  well-defined  objection  in  Congress  to  Iar  newspapers.  At  Guam,  it  is  carried 
extending  Navy  jurisdiction  over  public  across  the  island  by  motor  car  and  re" 
utilities.  This  opposition  lost  its  force  layed  bX  cable  to  Toky°>  whence  lt  1S 
in  face  of  the  undisputed  statement  of  distributed  through  Japan  by  "Kokusai," 
facts  and  the  very  grave  national  and  the  Japanese  news  agency.  At  Cavite 
international  interests  now  dependent  on  the  A-  R  rePort  1S  broadcasted  by  Navy 
news  communication  across  the  Pacific,  wireless,  and  picked  up  in  Shanghai  and 
It  was  conceded  that  congested  lines  Peking,  and  used  by  the  English  and 
and  prohibitive  rates  made  imprac-  vernacular  newspapers  of  China.  It  is 
ticable  the  use  of  private  cable  and  similarly  available  in  Vladivostok  and 
radio  lines  for  the  purpose,  and  that  the  elsewhere  if  there  be  receiving  stations 
plan  proposed  was  the  only  feasible  one  or  sniPs  to  record  it. 
that  promised  success.  The  resolution  The  Navy  Department  recently  an- 
was  passed  partly  because  of  my  assur-  nounced  that  it  is  prepared  to  carry  for 
ance,  that  with  proper  facilities,  and  a  the  news  associations  daily  east-bound 
six-cent  rate,  news  associations  and  in-  reports,  covering  news  of  the  Far  East 
dividual  newspapers  would  themselves  if  delivered  to  it  at  Manila  for  trans- 
insure  the  sending  of  independent  and  mission  to  San  Francisco.  Regular  re- 
reliable  news  reports.  The  authoriza-  ports  of  this  character  have  not  yet 
tion   was    granted    for   two    years    only,  been  inaugurated,  but  doubtless   will  be 


48 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


mmenced      when      arrangements      for 
gathering    news    from    the   continent    of 
\da  can  be  completed. 

The    French  Government   has   already 
entered     into     an     arrangement     under 

which  it   will  use  its  large  wireless  st; 

ii  at  Shanghai,  cooperating  with  our 
Navy  Department,  in  maintaining  wire- 
less communication  between  the  tv 
continents.  The  Navy  Department  is 
endeavoring  to  secure  under  this  ar- 
rangement, a  special  news  rate.  The 
American  Federal  Wireless  Company 
is  now  constructing  for  China  a  num 
her  i't  high  power  stations,  which,  when 
completed,  can  he  used  in  conjunction 
with  our  Navy  system  for  international 
news  communication;  and  Japan  has  al- 
ready officially  indicated  her  willingness 
to  cooperate  in  exchange  of  news  re- 
ports hy  wireless  with  the  United  States. 

This  brief  statement  of  the  facts  gives 
an  indication  of  the  development  already 
made  in  the  use  of  wireless  for  news 
mmunication  on  the  Pacific  and  the 
inner  in  which  the  system  can  he  ex- 
tended. It  i.s  only  necessary  for  Aus- 
tralia, New  Zealand  and  other  coun- 
tri(  adopt  the  policy  inaugurated  i>\ 

the    United    States,    and    now    working 
successfully  to  establish,  as  it  were,  wire- 
canals    for    the    carriage    of    inde- 
pendent new      report  boats,  and  make  a 
,  connection  with  the  canals  already  estab- 
lished,    and    there    can    be    then,    perfect 
interchange  across  the  Pacific,  among  all 
peoples,   of   uncensored   and    reliable 
news  reports. 

The    foundation   of   this    ideal    system 

rests,  it  will  be  sCrUi  upon  maintenance 
oi  "pen  way-  for  uncensored  news  re- 
ports at  a  low  word  rate,  and  accessi- 
bilit)  thereto  for  all  responsible  news 
associatii  ins,  i  ir  new  -papers. 

That  foundation  is  threatened  at  this 
time  in  the  fact  that  Congress  has  thus 
far  failed  to  renew  the  authorization   for 


use  of  Navy  radio  facilities  for  news 
purposes,  expiring  in  July,  1922,  and 
interested  parties  are  apparently  seeking 
to  prevent  congressional  action  in  the 
matter. 

Should  no  action  be  taken  by  Con- 
gress, the  present  reports  must  cease  in 
eight  months,  and  we  will  revert  at  once 
to  prior  conditions,  which  made  it  im- 
practical for  any  adequate  news  ex- 
change between  Asia  and  America. 
Wireless  and  cable  companies  regard 
news  as  objectionable  business,  requir- 
ing a  low  rate,  and  interfering  with 
profitable  commercial  business:  news 
rates  on  the  Pacific,  by  either  cable  or 
wireless,  are  prohibitive,  and  do  not  in-' 
sure  prompt  delivery,  three  times  the 
commercial  rate  being  asked  for  expe 
dited  service;  and  wireless  companies 
have  shown  a  disposition  to  duplicate 
cable  rates  instead  of  offering  much 
lower  rates. 

It  would  seem  the  proper  plan  there- 
fore, for  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World,  and  the  Pan-Pacific  Union,  is  to 
concentrate  all  their  energies  now  on 
securing  the  maintenance  of  the  pres- 
ent system  of  communication  by  the 
United  States,  and  the  adoption  of  a 
similar  policy  in  cooperation  by  all  other 
countries  on  the  Pacific.  We  do  not 
undertake  construction  of  canal  boats 
until  we  have  planned  and  ensured  con- 
struction of  our  main  canal,  and  en- 
couraged planning  of  subsidiary  feeding 
canals.  Time  and  energy  should  not  be 
wasted,  therefore,  in  devising  the  kind 
of  trans-Pacific  news  reports  to  estab- 
lish, or  the  agencies  that  shall  control 
them,  when  the  system  of  common  car- 
rier to  transmit  those  reports  has  not 
been  permanently  established.  Insure 
the  carrier  system,  with  facilities  open 
to  all,  and  the  other  problems  will  dis- 
appear as  rapidly  as  they  did  in  the 
matter  of  supplying  reports  to  Honolulu, 
Manila    and    Tokyo,    as    narrated    herein. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE.  49 


Interchange   of   News   in   the   Pacific 


By  Riley  H.  Allen 
Editor   Honolulu   Star-Bulletin. 

There  can  be  no  difference  of  opinion  greater  variety  of  news,  and  especially 

among  newspapermen   of   the   countries  for  Oriental  and  American  news,  to  be 

in  the  Pacific,  or  bordering  the  Pacific,  made  available   for  Australia  and   New 

as  to  the  high  desirability  of  that  mil-  Zealand.      Hawaii's    geographical    posi- 

lennium  of  "better  understanding"  about  tion    is    such,    and    the    development    of 

which   we   have    heard   with    significant  the   island  press   has   been   such,   as   to 

frequency  from  the  day  the  Press  Con-  bring  home  to  us  daily  the  desirability 

gress  of  the  World  opened.  of     a     vastly     increased     news     service 

We    need    not    debate    the    question  throughout    Pacific    lands.      We    know 

whether  freer  interchange  of  news  and  also  that  the  majority  of  newspapers  in 

views    about    really    important    Pacific  the    Pacific    islands    and    in    Asia    are 

questions    will    help    to    promote    better  financially   unable  to   assume   a   greater 

understanding — the   truth   of   it   is   self-  burden  of  news  expense  than  they  now 

evident.  carry,  and  many  are  finding  their  costs 

We  need  not  assure  our  Anglo-Saxon,  in  traffic  tariffs  and  the  salaries  of  cor- 

Japanese,  Chinese,  Filipino,  Korean  fel-  respondents  a  greater  load  than  is  com- 

low-newspapermen  that  if  the  channels  fortable. 

of  communication  about  and  across  the  Nor  need  I  emphasize  that  the  news- 
Pacific  were  broader  and  smoother,  we  papermen  of  Hawaii  believe  that  this 
who  live  about  the  Pacific  would  be  less  freer  interchange  of  national  news  would 
apt  to  suspect  each  other's  motives  and  have  a  beneficial  political  effect  in  addi- 
criticise  each  other's  actions.  The  truth  tion  to  its  obvious  benefit  to  the  news- 
of  that  is  self-evident,  too.  paper  by  the  greater  diversity  and  bal- 

Our  first  problem  is  right  here  among  ance  of  matter  which  it  could  offer  its 
those  of  us  who  are  fortunate  enough  readers.  Our  visitors,  I  am  sure,  will 
to  be  at  the  Press  Congress  of  the  not  have  failed  to  see  that  in  Hawaii 
World,  and  this  Pan-Pacifis  conference,  we  Americans  believe  in  frank  exchange 
It  is  to  translate  all  the  energy  and  fer-  of  views  on  important  and  sometimes 
vor  and  gallant  spirit  expressed  in  the  delicate  subject's  with  our  fellow-resi- 
many  addresses  and  papers  into  certain  dents  of  other  races.  On  a  vastly  larger 
concrete  terms  which  shall  formulate  at  scale,  that  same  principle  would  be  car- 
least  one  or  two  courses  of  action  to  be  ried  out  in  the  great  news-exchange 
undertaken  immediately  after  this  con-  which  we  should  like  to  see  developed 
ference  has  concluded.  for  the  Pacific. 

I  need  hardly  emphasize  to  our  visit-  Taking  it   for  granted   that  we   have 

ors    that    we    newspapermen    in    Hawaii  fairly  similar  ideas  on  the  principles  and 

agree   with   what   has   been   said   of   the  purposes   just    mentioned,    how   can   we 

need  for  lower  press  rates ;  the  need  for  put  them  into  action  ? 

a   broader   service   between   the    United  My  two  suggestions,  and  they  are  put 

States  and  the  Orient ;  the  need   for   a  forth  with  entire  knowledge  of  the  difFi- 


50 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


till t \  of  carrying  them  out,  are,  first,  an 
international  press  ran-;  and  secondly, 
the  use  of  government  wireless  stations 
t<  i  carry  the  new  s. 

In  connection  with  the  latter,  let  me, 
for  Hawaii,  heartily  second  what  Mr. 
McClatch)  of  Sacramento  said  to  the 
Press  Congress  of  the  World  a  few  days 
ago  thai  the  aerreemenl  by  which  the 
government  radio  is  made  available  for 
communications  on  the  Pacific  be  ex- 
tended, after  its  first  two-year  period 
ends  next  July.  The  renewal  of  this 
agreement  is  so  imperative  to  the 
welfare  of  the  American  newspapers 
of  the  Pacific  that  I  cannot  emphasize 
it  too  strongly.  It  means  so  much 
to  the  future  of  the  Pacific  for  press 
service  to  be  comprehensive,  unham- 
pered and  efficient  that  an  abrogation 
of  the  present  system  would  be  dis- 
asl  rous. 

1.  The  International  Press  Rate: 

Various  suggestions  have  been  made 

in  recent  years,  and  especially  since  the 
conclusion  of  the  World-War,  for  na- 
tional press  rates.  (  )ne  such  suggestion 
which  received  considerable  attention 
has,  1  believe,  been  considered  by  the 
British  government — that  a  uniform  one- 
cenl  rate  be  established  for  press  mat- 
ter between  any  two  points  in  the  Brit- 
ish dominions.  I  have  read  also  that 
the  French  government  has  considered 
a   similar  plan. 

Now  obviously  this  plan  is  not  based 
primarily  on  the  expense  of  such  a 
traffic  service.  It  takes  no  account  of 
distances  to  be  covered,  relays  to  be 
made  or  other  physical  features.  The 
plan  is  based  primarily  on  a  realization 
nt  the  value  of  an  empire-wide  press 
service,  a  service  which  shall  permit 
and  encourage  the  transmission  of  a 
great  volume  of  new-  at  a  low  cost.  It 
is  b;isC,l  on  a  recognition  of  the  need 
for   giving    to    far-separated    peoples    a 


sense    of    their    common    interests    and 
c<  immon  destinj . 

No  private  business  could  set  up  such 
an  arrangement,  in  which  the  charge  to 
patron  is  based  not  at  all  on  the  cost 
of  operation,  and  survive.  But  a  gov- 
ernment which  spends  billions  to  build 
battleships  which  may  newer  fire  a  shot, 
or  drill  armies  that  may  newer  be  called 
into  the  held,  can  subsidize  the  lines  of 
communication,  either  government-  or 
privately-owned,  and  make  such  a  uni- 
form  rate  possible. 

It  may  be  argued  that  while  a  single 
government  might  perfect  such  an  ar- 
rangement, the  technical  difficulties  in- 
volved  in  immense  distances  and  var- 
ious kinds  of  communication  facilities 
would  make  an  international  plan  im- 
possible. 1  do  not  think  so.  I  think 
that  if  we  accept  the  idea  of  an  inter- 
national press  rate  as  sound,  we  and 
other  countries  would  have  no  more 
difficulties  working  out  the  details  than 
we  had  with  our  international  postal 
conventions. — and  the  United  States,  for 
instance,  has  successfully  operated  un- 
der international  postal  conventions 
since    1869. 

This  is  a  day  when  international 
standardization  is  being  used  to  pro- 
mote business — why  not  use  it  to  pro- 
mote communications  and  peace?  We 
are  getting  to  a  universal  system  of 
weights  and  measures;  we  have  inter- 
national telegraphic  unions  already.  It 
is  noteworthy  that  an  adviser  to  the 
French  treasury  department.  Monsieur 
I.  Bourquin,  has  just  proposed  in  La 
Revue  Mondiale  an  international  money 
to  pass  at  par  throughout  the  world  in 
all    international   transactions. 

\  uniform  press  rate  would  im- 
mensely stimulate  and  simplify  press 
traffic  around  the  world.  I  think  per- 
haps its  greatest  value  would  be  to 
bring  world-news  to  remote  communi- 
ties.     Its    value    in    getting    the    larger 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


51 


communities  of  North  and  South  Amer- 
ica. Europe,  Asia,  Australasia,  and 
Africa  into  contact  with  each  other 
would  be  scarcely  less. 

1  do  not  mean  to  surest  government 
control  of  the  news  in  any  form,  except 
the  physical  features  of  the  traffic.  My 
thought  is  that  the  support  and  activi- 
ties of  the  governments  concerned 
would  he  confined  to  providing  the 
facilities  for  transmission,  and  paying 
the  hills — for  assuredly,  at  the  outset, 
there  would  he  some  deficits. 

Perhaps  the  single  arbitrary  control 
which  the  governments  should  exercise 
would  he  on  the  point  of  volume  of 
news  matter  to  he  carried.  Of  course 
they  could  not  he  expected  to  turn  their 
facilities  over  without  limit.  Within 
the  limits,  however,  it  should  not  he  a 
matter  of  government  dictation  what 
sort  of  matter  was  transmitted,  except 
as  are  already  imposed  by  constitutional 
law. 
2.  Use  of  Government  Wireless  Stations 

What  1  have  just  said  on  a  uniform 
press  rate  must  he  considered  with  the 
second  suggestion  of  greatly  developing 
the  use  of  government  wireless. 

Hawaii  has  made  and  is  making  per- 
haps greater  use  of  wireless  in  peace- 
time than  any  other  community  in  the 
world.  It  was  in  these  islands  that 
wireless  was  first  made  commercially 
practicable.  For  a  good  many  years 
the  daily  papers  of  Honolulu  have  re- 
ceived almost,  and  are  now  receiving 
all.  of  their  news  report  by  wireless. 

<  )ur  very  successful  use  of  wireless, 
and  especially  the  fine  cooperation  and 
efficient  traffic  arrangements  which  the 
Honolulu  papers  are  receiving  from  the 
United  States  naval  radio  system  makes 
me  believe  it  entirely  practicable  for 
governments  to  place  their  wireless  sys- 
tems in  the  service  of  the  press — and 
not.  of  course,  from  a  commercial  mo- 
tive, but  from  the  patriotic  and  quite  as 


legitimate  motive  of  promoting  world- 
interests. 

Wireless  is  still  in  its  infancy,  and 
yet  today  Hawaii  can  talk  with  Paris. 
If  necessary,  we  could  tonight  put  a 
message  into  that  barred  capital  of 
Soviet  Russia  which  is  under  the 
shadows  of  mystery  almost  as  deep  as 
those  which  once  shrouded  the  For- 
bidden City.  During  the  war  our  navy 
operators  here  heard  French  operators 
on  a  lofty  tower  in  Bordeaux,  and  ( ier- 
man  operators  signalling  from  the 
masts  at  Nauen. 

Establishment       of       pr<  wireless 

around  the  world,  with  the  governments 
providing  traffic  facilities,  means  three 
principal  prior  things: 

First,  agreement  by  the  governments 
that  they  will  do  it.  Secondly,  the  erec- 
tion of  wireless  stations  at  many  points 
and  the  enlargement  and  strengthening 
of  other  stations.  Thirdly,  the  develop- 
ment of  news  exchange  agreements  and 
contracts  between  existing  news  agen- 
cies, and  probably  an  international  news 
agency  to  supervise  the  great  system. 
And  the  government  service  should  be 
so  developed  that  the  individual  corre- 
spondent would  be  able  to  file  his  dis- 
patches without  danger  of  being  choked 
off  or  crowded  out  by  the  big  agencies. 

Such  a  plan  might  seem  Utopian  were 
it  not  for  our  experience  in  Hawaii  with 
the  use  of  the  United  States  navy  radio 
svstem.  By  act  of  congress,  the  facili- 
ties of  the  navy  wireless  have  been 
made  available  to  American  newspapers 
and  news  agencies,  and  the  compara- 
tively short  time  this  has  been  in  opera- 
tion has  proved  a  boon  to  the  local 
dailies. 

We  have  found  the  navy  officers  and 
staff  charged  with  the  duty  of  handling 
this  traffic  keenly  alive  to  its  impor- 
tance, deeply  interested  in  perfecting; 
the  technical  side,  and  with  their  imagi- 
nations   stirred   by    the   possibilities    for 


52  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

development    of    this    mysterious    force  legitimate  business  of  commercial  cable 

which   can   fling  the  words   of  men   in-  and  wireless  systems.     As  international 

stantly  to  immense  distances,  to  be  read  business  grows,  these  are  finding  their 

by  millions  of  people  we  shall  never  see  facilities    taxed    in    the    straight    com- 

but  whose  interests  more  and  more  are  mercial  traffic.     Some  of  them  frankly 

becoming  identical  with  ours.  do  not  want  to  handle  press  service. 

The  local  staff  and  equipment  of  the  Nor  do  I  propose  any  system  to  tear 
na\  \  radio  can  handle  with  ease  27,000  down  the  large  news-gathering  and 
words  a  day.  You  have  perhaps  noticed  distribution  agencies  whose  development 
that  during  the  sessions  of  the  Congress  is  really  among  the  wonders  of  the 
we  have  been  printing  an  augmented  world.  Today  we  have  a  close  and 
telegraphic  service.  In  addition  to  the  cordial  cooperation  between  the  Asso- 
regular  daily  news  report  of  the  Asso-  ciated  Press  and  the  United  States  navy 
ciated  Press,  we  are  getting  more  than  radio  in  bringing  world-news  to  Ha- 
a  thousand  words  extra  a  day  from  the  waii,  and  I  have  no  doubt  that  same 
Associated  Press  and  the  Chicago  cordial  spirit  could  be  maintained  with 
Tribune,  recognizing  the  importance  of  international  systems, 
this  congress,  has  enterprisingly  given  a  In  peace-time — and  this  whole  con- 
three  thousand  word  daily  report  espec-  gress  is  an  illustration  of  the  hope  that 
ially  compiled  by  its  syndicate  service,  peace  may  continue — in  peace-time  the 
All  of  this  has  been  handled  efficiently  government  wireless  can  easily  handle 
by  the  navy  radio  here — more,  it  was  an  immense  press  traffic.  The  United 
handled  without  serious  delay  or  inter-  States  navy  plant  and  staff  here  can 
ruption  even  when  we  were  getting  handle  a  much  larger  volume  of  traffic 
play-by-play  bulletins,  every  few  min-  than  it  is  now  called  upon  to  handle, 
utes,  on  the  world-series  baseball  at  New  With  the  increase  in  number  of  wireless 
York  last  week.  stations,     and    the    steadily     improving 

It  seems  to  me  that  governments  may  service  which  the  fertile  invention  and 
well  expend  some  of  the  great  sums  they  the  enthusiastic  industry  of  wireless  ex- 
will  save  by  limitation  of  armaments  in  perts  are  developing,  it  will  become 
developing  wireless  press  service.  It  more  and  more  easy  to  flash  tens  of 
would  not  take  many  of  the  millions  of  thousands  of  words  a  day  around  the 
dollars  which  go  into  dreadnoughts,  to  world.  That  opens  to  the  newspaperman 
build  stations  and  establish  operating  such  a  vista  of  possibilities  that  it  seems 
staffs  sufficient  to  cover  the  globe.  indeed  like  a  dream.     But  a  great  part 

Such  a  plan  as  is  herewith  suggested  of  that  dream  has  already  come  true  in 

would   not  necessarily  conflict  with   the  this  part  of  the  Pacific. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


53 


Field  of  Service  for  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Congress 


Lorrin  A.  Thurston 
Proprietor  Honolulu  Advertiser 


"'Oo's    the   bloke?" 

"  'Ee's  a  stranger." 

"  'Eave  a  'arf  a  brick  at  'im !' 

(From  a  suppositious  conversation  be- 
tween two  English  laborers  concerning 
a  passerby.) 

The  foregoing  is  illustrative  of  a 
trait  in  human  nature — an  innate  feel- 
ing that  every  stranger  is  an  enemy. 

It  is  doubtless  an  inheritance  from 
the  days  of  the  "cave  era,"  when  man 
was  a  "beast  of  prey,"  taking  what  he 
could  and  holding  what  he  took — when 
he  was  strong  enough  to  do  so. 

It  is  a  survival  from  the  days  of  un- 
curbed individualism,  when  "might 
was  right" — when  every  man's  hand 
was  against  every  other  man. 

In  these  twentieth  century  days,  man- 
kind has  progressed  to  the  extent,  at 
least,  that  all  other  men  are  not  neces- 
sarily enemies ;  that  some  may  even  be. 
prima  facie,  friends — those,  for  exam- 
ple, of  the  same  family,  clan,  and,  more 
latterly,  of  the  same  nation — although 
it  is  historically  but  of  yesterday  that 
the  Scot  and  Briton  looked  askance  at 
one  another,  and  even  the  "hielander" 
and  the  "lowlander"  of  "bonny  Scot- 
land" were  each  the  legitimate  prey  of 
the  other ;  and  the  warm  sentiment 
with  which,  on  general  principles,  a 
south-of-Irelander  still  regards  the 
English  needs  no  elaborate  proof. 

The  millenium  is  not  in  sight.  It  is 
not  even  within  hearing  distance  over 
the  horizon,  nor  within  signaling  dis- 
tance by  wireless  !• 

Is    Manifestation    of    Spirit 

It  is,  however,  conceivable  that  the 
friendliness  which  has  in  course  of  time 
expanded  from  family  to  clan,  from 
clan  to  nation,  and,  to  some  extent,  to 


nations  of  kindred  blood  or  principles, 
can  be  extended  to  nations  not  of  the 
same  race  origin,  or  who  have  been 
nurtured  to  revere  different  ideals ! 

It  is  an  axiom  that  "like  produces 
like." 

That  acquaintance  begets  friendliness. 

"Pan-Pacificism"  as  evidenced  in  and 
through  the  "Pan-Pacific  Union"  is  the 
visible  manifestation  of  a  spirit — a  sen- 
timent ;  and  that  spirit — that  sentiment 
is,  that  friendliness  begets  friendliness 
— friendliness  evolves  cooperation,  and 
cooperation  results  in  progress. 

The  great  distances  between  the 
shores  of  the  Pacific,  and,  until  re- 
cently, the  scarcity  of  speedy  steamers 
and  the  complete  absence  of  cables  and 
wireless,  prevented  communication  be- 
tween the  countries  bordering  thereon; 
knowledge  of  what  was  transpiring 
across  the  ocean  and  intimate  acquaint- 
ance between  citizens  of  the  Occident 
and  the  Orient,  almost  as  completely 
as  though  the  respective  countries  had 
been  located  in  separate  worlds. 

No  better  evidence  is  required  of  the 
recent  remoteness  of  Hawaii  from  the 
other  Pacific  countries-,  and  they  from 
each  other,  than  the  fact  that  the  news 
of  the  election  of  President  McKinley 
came  to  Honolulu  by  a  steamer  sailing 
from  Yokohama,  Japan,  and  the  news 
that  President  Cleveland  intended  to 
restore  the  Hawaiian  monarchy  reached 
Hawaii  by  a  steamer  sailing  from  Vic- 
toria, Canada,  and  the  news  of  the  rec- 
ognition of  the  provisional  government 
of  Hawaii  by  the  United  States  reached 
Hawaii  by  a  steamer  sailing  from  Auck- 
land, New  Zealand. 

During  the  past  two  decades  com- 
munication,   both    steam    and    electric, 


54 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


across  the  Pacific  has  rapidly  devel- 
oped; but,  until  a  chance  visitor — one 
Alexander  I  Innie  Ford — breezed  into 
Honolulu,  well  within  that  period,  but 
little  advance  had  been  made  in  the 
bringing  together  of  the  peoples  of  the 
Pacific. 

Tribute    Paid    Ford 

Whether  Ford  evolved  the  spirit  of 
"Pan-Pacificism"- —the  spirit  of  friend- 
lines-  of  co-operation — of  progress, 
out  of  his  own  inner  consciousness,  or 
whether  he  crvstalized  it  out  of  the 
balmy  breezes  and  friendly  atmosphere 
•  if  Hawaii,  has  not  been  revealed;  but 
as  a  matter  of  historical  fact,  the  gen- 
tleman was  soon  in  full  cry  Upon  a 
scent  which  led  to  a  shrine  dedicated 
to  friendliness  entitled  "The  Hands 
Around    the    Pacific    Club." 

After  spending  some  months  in  Ho- 
nolulu proclaiming  the  virtues  of  this 
organization  to  a  somewhat  skeptical 
community,  remindful  of  the  voice  of 
the  prophet  crying  in  the  wilderness. 
Ford,  not  a  bit  discouraged  or  abashed, 
departed  on  a  swing  around  the  grand 
circuit  of  the  Pacific,  taking  in  New 
Zealand.  Australia,  the  Philippines, 
China  and  Japan. 

The  only  credentials  which  he  carried 
were  his  own  optimistic,  almost  beatific 
enthusiasm  and  a  letter  from  the  gover- 
nor of  Hawaii  couched  in  somewhat 
general  terms,  to  the  effect  that  the 
writer  thought  that   Ford  was  "alright." 

In  the  course  of  a  year  or  so  Ford 
returned  to  Honolulu — not  with  a  string 
of  scalps  at  his  belt,  but  with  a  sheaf 
of  endorsements  of  the  "Hands  Around 
the  Pacific"  ideal,  by  high  officials  and 
public  organizations  of  the  several 
countries  named,  where  branches  of  the 
new  organization  had  been  established 
by  him.  A  natural  inquiry  was: 
"What  is  there  in  this  for  Ford?" 
Honolulu  has  long  ago  arrived  at  the 
conclusion    that    there    is    nothing    in    it 


for  Ford — nothing  except  the  "joy  oi 
service"  and  the  exhilaration  incident 
to    accomplishment. 

This  brilliant  beginning  of  a  move- 
ment which  has  finally  evolved  into  the 
Tan-Pacific  Union,  was  due  to  Ford's 
intense  enthusiasm,  patent  sincerity  and 
unflagging  energy  ;  but  even  these  quali- 
ties, combined  as  they  were,  with  his 
magnetic  and  almost  uncanny  faculty 
of  setting  other  people  to  work,  would 
not  have  succeeded  in  galvanizing  the 
traditional  lethargy  of  the  East  into 
action,  if  it  had  not  been  that  the  time 
was  ripe  for  just  such  a   movement. 

Spirit   Takes   Hold 

That  the  time  was  ripe,  is  evidenced 
by  the  rapidity  with  which  the  spirit 
of  "Pan-Pacificism"  has  taken  hold  and 
"friendly  cooperation"  become  the 
slogan  of  all  the  Pacific  countries  which 
have  come  within  the  sphere  of  the 
spirit. 

There  seems  to  have  come  into  the 
Pacific  world — spontaneously — like  unto 
a  new  creation — the  feeling  that  the  old 
policies  of  aloofness — of  isolation — of 
"every  man  for  himself  and  the  devil 
take    the    hindermost,"    are    obsolete. 

The  feeling  that  friendliness  and  co- 
operation were  to  lead  the-  Pacific  na- 
tions out  of  the  wilderness  of  suspi- 
cion and  doubt,  seems  to  have  been  just 
beneath  the  surface,  awaiting  the  magic 
touch  which  should  crystalize  this  latent 
sentiment  into  realization  and  action— 
and  this  touch  was  supplied  by  Ford. 

So  much  for  the  animating  cause  and 
the  avenue  through  which  "Pan-Paci- 
ficism" has  arrived  at  its  present  posi- 
tion  of   beneficent   activity. 

It  is  easy  to  formulate  generalities 
and  express  appreciation  of  good  in- 
tentions; but  "the  proof  of  the  pudding 
is  in  the  eating  of  it,"  and  one  fact  is 
worth    a    hundred    theories. 

I  wish  to  place  on  record  a  concrete 
instance  of  accomplishment  directly  due 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


55 


to  the  Pan-Pacific  Union,  which  would 
not  have  occurred  but  for  the  existence 
of  that  organization,  which  appears  to 
me  to  justify  all  of  the  time,  effort  and 
expense  which  has  been  expended  upon 
its   organization  and  maintenance. 

In  October,  1920,  a  most  disturbing 
condition  of  affairs  existed  in  Hawaii, 
with  possibilities  of  developing  in  such 
manner  as  to  intensify  already  existing 
race  suspicion,  leading  even  to  possible 
international  friction. 

Following  the  war  spirit  engendered 
on  the  mainland  against  the  German 
newspapers  and  schools  and  the  propa- 
ganda carried  on  through  them,  the 
sentiment  had  become  prevalent  in  Ha- 
waii that  the  local  so-called  "Language 
Schools"-— chiefly  Japanese — should  be 
abolished  or  radically  controlled. 

An  attempt  to  accomplish  this 
through  the  local  Legislature  of  1918, 
excited  so  much  opposition  on  the  part 
of  those  who  would  be  affected  thereby, 
that  the  proposed  legislation   failed. 

The  Language  School  Matter 

Instead  of  settling  the  question  this 
failure  to  secure  action  aggravated  the 
situation  and  the  avowed  determination 
was  expressed  throughout  the  Territory 
that  Language  Schools  should  and  must 
be  abolished. 

The  Attorney  General  and  the  Cham- 
ber of  Commerce  of  Honolulu,  the  lead- 
ing civic  organization  of  the  -Territory, 
caused  drafts  of  bills  for  this  purpose 
to  be  drawn  and  published. 

There  was  no  sign  of  abatement  of 
opposition  to  the  proposed  measures 
and  there  seemed  no  prospect  for  settle- 
ment of  the  issue  except  upon  a  basis 
which  would  leave  a  permanent  feeling 
of  resentment  in  a  large  part  of  the 
community  against  the  ruling  element 
thereof,  based  upon  the  beliefs  that  the 
former  had  been  unjustly  and  unfairly 
dealt  with. 


A  special  term  of  the  Legislature  was 
already  in  session  and  the  anti-Lan- 
guage School  bills  under  consideration. 

At  tins  stage  of  events  a  "Pan-Pacific 
Banquet"  was  held  at  the  International 
Y.   M.   C.   A.   building  in   Honolulu. 

Upon  this  particular  occasion  the 
threatening  aspect  of  the  Language 
School  question  rippled  the  placid  surf- 
ace of  the  international  pool  somewhat 
more  than  usual,  and  out  of  the  discus- 
sion there  was  evolved  a  plan  between 
certain  of  the  Japanese  and  some  of  the 
Americans  present,  by  which  it  was 
hoped  that  a  friendly  settlement  of  the 
issue  might  be  promoted. 

The  initiative  was  taken  by  the  Jap- 
anese and  the  ground  work  of  a  regu- 
latory legislative  act  suggested. 

This  was  presented  the  next  day  to 
a  meeting  of  the  American  Chamber  of 
Commerce  which  had  been  especially 
convened  to  consider  the  bills  which 
had  been  drafted  by  its  own  committee. 

The  chamber  debated  its  own  bill  and 
the  proposition  submitted  by  the  Jap- 
anese for  several  hours,  and  adjourned 
without   action. 

Plan  Takes  Shape 

Four  days  later  it  met  again  and  re- 
ceived in  confirmation  of  the  original 
proffer  a  written  draft  of  a  bill  to 
carry  the  original  proposition  into  ef- 
fect, accompanied  by  a  letter  signed 
by  a  committee  of  24  Japanese  residents 
of  Honolulu,  representing  the  business. 
financial,  professional,  and  religious 
leadership  of  the  community  of  that 
nationality,  and  the  editors  of  three  of 
the  daily  Japanese  newspapers  pub- 
lished in  Honolulu,  asserting  that  they 
were  responsible  for  the  proposed  act 
and  would  support  its  enactment  and 
execution. 

As  a  result  of  this  action,  the  Cham- 
ber of  Commerce  by  a  vote  of  5  to  1 
endorsed  the  measure  presented  by  the 
Japanese  in  place  of  that  presented  by 


56                        FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

its    own    committee,    and    recommended  appreciative    of    the    fair    and    friendly 

its  enactment  by  the  Legislature.  treatment  accorded  them  by  the  educa- 

The    bill    was    forthwith     introduced  tional   authorities    of   the   territory   and 

into  the  Legislature.  the  American  community  has  been  more 

A  public   hearing  was   given   thereon  than  pleased  at  the  prompt  acquiescence 

by   the  committee  to  whom  it  was  re-  and  manifest  sincerity  of  the  language 

f erred  at  which  the  community  was  in-  school  authorities  involved.      It  is  even 

vited   to   express   its   views.     This   was  reported    that    some    of     the     teachers, 

freely  done   for  an   entire   forenoon.  through    the    medium    of    their    studies. 

The  ultimate  result  was  that  the  sen-  have  been  converted  from  imperialism 
ate  passed  the  bill  which  had  been  into  enthusiastic  advocates  of  a  demo- 
i .tiered  by  the  Japanese,  by  a  unanimous  cratic  form  of  government, 
vote  and  the  house  of  representatives  Through  the  medium  of  the  Pan- 
by  a  vote  of  approximately  5  to  1  and  Pacific  Union's  method  of  discussion 
the  measure  was  signed  by  the  Gover-  across  the  table  and  "getting  together" 
nor.  in     friendly     cooperation,     a     question 

The  law  contains  many  details — pre-  which  a  year  ago  seriously  threatened 
scribed  the  time  and  bours  of  sessions  ;  the  peace  of  mind  of  this  community 
subjected  the  curriculum  to  the  control  with  the  possibility  even  of  its  affecting 
of  the  local  board  of  education ;  re-  international  relations  has  been  arnica- 
quired  the  schools  and  teachers  to  be  bly  and  satisfactorily  settled. 
licensed,  the  latter  to  be  subject  to  the  While  all  of  the  issues  now  pending 
ability  of  the  teachers  to  pass  an  ex-  between  Pacific  countries  cannot  be 
amination  in  speaking  and  writing  the  settled  as  easily  or  as  promptly  as  was 
English  language  and  in  knowledge  of  the  language  school  question  in  Hawaii, 
the  American  Constitution  and  history  the  principles  involved  in  the  settle- 
and  of  the  ideals  of  Democracy.  ment  of  this  question  are  equally  applic- 

The  same  Japanese  committee  which  able  to  the  larger  and  more  serious  is- 
had  originally  proposed  the  legislation  sues  now  pending  or  which  may  here- 
then  took  up  with  the  territorial  board  after  arise. 

of    education    the    question    of    securing  The   spirit   of   "Pan-Pacificism"-— that 

special    instruction,    at    the    expense    of  is,   the  spirit   of  settling   differences   by 

the    language    school    teachers,    in    the  friendly    face   to    face   consultation   and 

subjects  upon  which  they  were  required  mutual    cooperation,    will    not    immedi- 

to  pass  an  examination.  ately  bring  the  millenium,  but  it  offers 

The    board    of    education    cooperated  a   better   and  more  hopeful  method   of 

with  great  energy  and  friendliness,  such  settling     international     differences     and 

instruction  beginning  early  in  this  year  preventing  war  than  any  other  method 

1921.  yet  proposed. 

On  July  1st  last  the  required  examin-  "Friendly     consultation     and     mutual 

ations  were  taken  by  approximately  300  cooperation"  is  a  slogan  worthy  of  the 

Japanese  language  school  teachers,   be-  earnest  and  enthusiastic  support  of  this 

sides   those   of   other   nationality   and   a  organization. 

large  majority  of  them  passed  and  were  I    trust,    hope    and    believe    that    the 

duly   licensed.  Pan-Pacific  Press  organization  this  day 

The  language  school  teachers  affected  formed    will    be    an    added    and    potent 

by  this  law  have  expressed  themselves,  influence    in    advancing    the    beneficent 

practically  unanimously,  as  being  highly  objects  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


57 


Open   Diplomacy,    the   Hope   of   the   Pacific   Press 


HOLLINGTON   K.   TONG 

Peking  editor  of  the  Weekly  of  the  Far  East,  Director  of  the 

North  China  Star  of  Tientsin,  representative  of  the  Peking 

and  Tientsin  newspapers  and  of  the  Commercial  Tress 

of   Shanghai   and    the    North    China    Daily    Mail 

of    Tientsin. 


In  three  weeks'  time  a  conference  of 
international  significance  called  by  Pres- 
ident Warren  G.  Harding  will  be  held 
at  Washington,  D.  C,  to  consider  the 
Pacific  questions  and  the  advisability  of 
the  reduction  of  armaments  of  the  lead- 
ing nations.  More  than  one  hundred 
Chinese  delegates  and  experts  are  now 
on  their  way  to  the  Capital  of  the 
United  States,  and  Japan  is  sending 
twice  that  number  of  officials  to  attend 
the  conference.  Other  participating  na- 
tions are  taking  a  similar  great  interest 
in  the  Washington  meeting.  The  im- 
portance of  the  forthcoming  event  in 
America  is  self-evident.  If  this  im- 
portant Washington  conference  is  to  be 
successful,  the  principle  of  open  diplo- 
macy must  be  religiously  observed  by 
those  who  are  to  participate  therein. 

The  press  on  the  other  side  of  the 
Pacific  Ocean  has  repeatedly  expressed 
its  hope  that  at  the  coming  Washington 
meeting  parlor  discussions  would  not  be 
resorted  to,  that  all  of  its  proceedings 
would  be  thrown  open  to  the  public  as 
far  as  advisable  and  that  whatever  se- 
cret understandings  that  might  be  pre- 
viously entered  into  would  not  be  recog- 
nized as  having  the  binding  force.  It 
has  uttered  a  warning  against  the  repe- 
tition of  the  unwise  secret  diplomacy 
which  has  usually  characterized  the  de- 
cisions of  vital  questions  at  international 
conferences  in  the  past.  Without  ex- 
ception, all  the  newspapers  in  China  are 


unanimous  in  voicing  their  wish  for  the 
adoption  of  open  diplomacy  as  the  car- 
dinal principle  of  the  Washington  con- 
ference, and  looking  forward  to  that 
conference  openly  to  lay  down  righteous 
and  just  lines  along  which  all  interna- 
tional affairs  that  may  arise  on  the  Pa- 
cific  should   be  regulated. 

A  section  of  the  press  in  Japan  which 
is  liberal  in  its  opinion  on  international 
relationship  is  sharing  the  foregoing 
views,  knowing  that  the  present  Pacific 
situation  is  far  from  being  satisfactory 
and  that  a  little  intrigue  here  anc1^  there 
may  start  a  worldwide  conflict  anew. 
Undoubtedly  the  press  on  this  side  of 
the  ocean  may  also  urge  open  proceed- 
ings at  the  Washington  conference  and 
ask  that  the  peoples  of  the  interested 
nations  should  be  taken  into  confidence 
of  negotiators  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
it  is  they  who  will  have  to  make  good 
whatever  promises  that  their  statesmen 
may  make.  But  as  yet  it  has  not  taken 
a  definite  stand  on  the  issue.  If  the 
Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  can  rouse 
the  press  in  America  and  other  coun- 
tries which  are  sending  delegates  to  the 
Washington  meeting  to  take  a  renewed 
interest  in  the  matter  of  open  diplomacy 
during  the  next  three  weeks,  it  will  ren- 
der a  useful  service  to  humanity. 

As  a  press  representative  from  China. 
I  propose  that  the  Pan-Pacific  Press 
Conference  pass  a  resolution  advocating 


58 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


statesmen  of  various  nations  who  arc 
to  sil  at  the  meeting  reflect  twice 
before  they  would  follow  in  the  foot- 
steps  of  those  who  have  in  the  past 
endeavored  to  arrive  at  secret  under- 
standings. It  should  be  sent  broadcast 
to  the  Pacific  press  and  especially  to 
the  newspapers  in  America  which  can 
exert  more  influence  than  their  contem- 
poraries in  the  Far  East  in  this  connec- 
tion, inasmuch  as,  first  of  all.  the  meet- 
ing place  of  the  conference  is  to  be  in 
their  capital,  and  secondly,  they  are  al- 
ways looked  up  to  by  the  Americans  as 
leaders  of  public  opinion.  Copies  of 
the  resolution  should  be  specially  sent 
to  President  I  larding'.  American  officials 
and  officials  of  the  other  nations  by  the 
I 'an  Pacific  Press  Conference  in  order 
to  inform  them  in  advance  of  the  col- 
lective wish  of  the  Pacific  press.  Unless 
this  i>  done,  it  will  be  hard  for  those 
newspapers  who  would  like  to  see  in- 
trigues replaced  by  open  proceedings  to 
realize  their  hope. 

A  statement  concisely  worded  may  be 
prepaved  by  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Con- 
ference to  support  and  amplify  and  ex- 
plain the  resolution  mentioned.  A  re- 
quest for  the  publication  of  the  state 
incut  as  well  as  of  the  resolution  should 
be  sent  to  all  the  newspapers  in  Amer- 
ica, Canada,  Japan,  China  and  other 
countries  in  order  to  enlist  the  support 
ot  the  press  world  in  general.  If  suf- 
ficient public  pressure  can  be  brought 
to  bear  upon  those  statesmen  who  have 
made  secret  diplomacy  a  profession  and 
considered  it  as  an  expediency,  the  hope 
ot  the  Pacific  press  may  yet  be  realized, 
the  Washington  conference  may  go 
down  in  history  as  the  first  internation- 
al conference  none  of  the  decisions  of 
which  has  been  secretly  reached  before 
hand,  and  the  out -landing  questions  be- 
tween the  Pacific  nations  may  be  solved 
to  the  satisfaction  of  their  peoples, 
which  ultimately  will  lead  to  a  better 
international  understanding. 


Not  only  should  the  proceedings  of 
the  Washington-  conference  be  guided 
by  full  publicity,  but  also  daily  inter- 
national intercourse  should  be  so  regu- 
lated. If  the  nations  can  be  frank  in 
their  relationships  with  their  neighbors, 
the  chance  of  war  might  be  much  mini- 
mized. It  is  the  countries  which  did 
not  show  their  cards  on  the  table  while 
engaged  in  negotiations  which  were  ac- 
countable for  the  large  proportion  of 
the  past  warfare.  History  is  full  of  in- 
stances to  illustrate  this  point.  On  the 
other  hand,  if  the  diplomats  concerned 
are  Open-minded  and  abhor  secret  diplo- 
matic practices,  a  serious  situation  may 
be  averted  and  substituted  by  a  better 
relationship. 

Secret  diplomacy  is  often  disadvan- 
tageous to  the  country  or  countries  which 
resort  to  it.  They  cannot  continue 
practising  it  without  being  found  out. 
(  )nce  discovered  the}'  lose  the  respect  of 
civilized  mankind.  Even  if  they  are 
truthful  once  in  a  while  in  what  thev 
say  or  promise,  the  nations  with  which 
they  have  dealings  would  suspect  them 
and  would  refrain  from  placing  faith  in 
them.  This  is  bad  enough  for  them, 
but  the  worst  has  yet  to  come.  Be- 
cause  of  their  secret  diplomatic  deal- 
ings, they  usually  keep  back  the  news 
concerned  as  long  as  possible.  The 
newspapers  which  by  chance  should  get 
a  tip  therein  often  magnify  the  serious- 
ness of  the  situation  and  call  upon  im- 
agination for  assistance  in  writing  up 
the  story  when  they  fail  to  get  from 
the  officials  the  true  facts,  corrections 
are  usually  belated,  and  the  reading 
public  as  a  rule  places  more  confidence 
in  the  first  story  than  in  the  subse- 
quent corrections.  An  ambitious  goS 
eminent  may  be  aersrressive  in  nine  out 
ten  cases,  but  when  it  has  really  ren- 
dered some  disinterested  service  to  man- 
kind  in   the  tenth   case,   no  one   will   be- 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


59 


lieve  its  altruism.  Its  credit  has  been 
lost,  and  none  would  have  confidence 
therein.  Injuries,  direct  or  indirect. 
from  the  loss  of  credit  by  a  nation, 
must  be  tremendous.  Is  it  worth  while 
to  reap  such  a  disastrous  fruit  from 
the  continued  practice  of  secret  diplo- 
macy? The  reply  of  an  influential  sec- 
tion of  the  press  on  the  Pacific  is  in  the 
negative. 

Today  open  diplomacy  is  more  needed 
than  ever  before.  The  future  ahead  of 
us  is  rather  gloomy  indeed.  A  new  in- 
ternational clash  that  shall  drown  the 
world  in  a  lake  of  blood  beside  which 
the  late  blood-letting  in  Europe  will  ap- 
pear but  as  a  small  stream  is  freely 
predicted  and  tremblingly  feared.  Some 
have  forecasted  that  the  time  for  the 
conflict  between  the  East  and  West  is 
also  fast  approaching.  Small  incidents 
which  have  happened  in  the  past  are 
magnified  by  the  yellow  press  of  the 
world  out  of  all  proportion  either  to 
their  cause  or  to  their  significance. 
Even  the  thinking  peoples  in  all  coun- 
tries become  nervous,  and  are  afraid  of 
the  day  when  another  world-war  may 
be  waged.  At  such  a  time,  the  use  of  a 
little  secret  diplomacy  may  cause  the 
explosion  and  bring  woe  to  peaceful  in- 
habitants of  God's  earth. 

No    organization,    in    my    opinion,    is 
more   fitted    than    the    Pan-Pacific    Press 


conference  to  endeavor  to  make  open 
diplomacy  an  accepted  creed  of  in- 
ternational statecraft  and  to  decide  at 
its  first  session  upon  the  attainment  of 
this  object  as  one  of  its  aims.  With 
the  support  of  President  Harding)  one 
of  its  honorary  presidents,  who  can- 
not but  be  sympathetic  with  our  motive, 
J  fully  believe  that  this  press  confer- 
ence may  he  able  to  accomplish  some- 
thing in  that  direction.  The  rulers  of 
other  countries  may  be  requested  to 
lend  their  support  to  the  carrying  out 
of  the  program.  I  feel  certain  that 
the  President  of  the  Republic  of  China 
will  be  glad  to  do  all  he  can  in  this 
worthy  matter. 

I  sincerely  hope  that  before  the  ad- 
journing of  the  first  session  of  the  Pan- 
Pacific  conference  a  resolution  will  be 
passed  advocating  the  publication  of 
all  the  proceedings  of  the  Washington 
conference  as  wished  by  the  Pacific 
press,  and  that  steps  would  be  taken  by 
the  officers  of  the  Pan- Pacific  Union  to 
give  to  the  resolution  wide  publicity 
and  to  try  to  put  that  great  principle 
into  effect  as  earl}-  as  possible.  The 
Washington  conference  to  be  held  on 
November  11th  should  give  us  an  im- 
petus to  work  for  this  object  which  I 
believe  must  be  cherished  by  all  the 
newspapermen  who  desire  peace  on 
earth    and   good    will    towards    mankind. 


60 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


The  Pan-Pacific  Union   and   the   Canadian   Press 


By  (  )swald  Mayrand 

Managing  Ed  it  or  "La  Prcsse"  Montreal, 

Canada. 


I  Canada  has  a  coast  line  of  7000  miles 
■  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  so  that  my  coun- 
try is  quite  naturally  interested  in  all 
questions  concerning  the  Pan-Pacific 
I  Dion  Tress  Conference.  The  Canadian 
press  at  large  is  aware  of  the  fact  that 
the  eyes  of  the  whole  world  are  actually 
drawn  upon  the  Pacific's  problems  and 
all  the  journalists  of  my  country  are 
anxious  to  contribute,  as  much  as  pos- 
sible to  the  solution  of  such  problems. 

As  it  has  already  been  said  by  some 
speakers  at  the  present  Press  Congress 
of  the  World,  mutual  understanding  is 
to  be  sought  by  all  nations  who  want  to 
live  in  peace  with  their  neighbors.  And 
to  make  nations  understand  each  other, 
the  lowering  of  the  rates  of  fast  com- 
munications by  land  telegraph,  cable 
and  wireless  seems  especially  desirable. 
*     *     * 

The  shortness  of  unskilled  labor,  as 
it  exists  in  the  Hawaiian  Territory,  is, 
for  instance,  a  serious  question  to  be 
settled  by  the  government  of  the  United 
States,  but  the  press  of  the  whole  Pan- 
Pacific  Union  is  taking  a  deep  interest 
in  the  solution  of  such  economic  prob- 
lem which  may  have  a  wide  bearing  on 
the  international  labor.  There  is  actually 
so  much  unemployment  all  over  the 
world  that  it  is  lamentable  to  see  in 
these  days  of  general  postwar  hardships 
courageous  men  as  the  Hawaiian  in- 
dustrial leaders  short  of  labormen.  Let 
us  hope  that  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  is  on  the  verge  to  bring 
forth  a  solution  which  shall  secure 
necessary  labor  and  prosperity  to  these 


islands     without     jeopardizing     the    se- 
curity of  the  American  Republic. 
*     *     * 

The  Canadian  Press,  Limited,  which 
supplies  nearly  all  the  dailies  with  for- 
eign news  as  well  as  local  news,  is  a 
cooperative  organization  of  which  most 
newspapers  of  the  Dominion  are  mem- 
bers. She  has  reliable  correspondents 
in  all  the  great  cities  of  my  country  and 
her  connections  with  the  Associated 
Press  of  the  United  States  secure  to 
our  people  a  satisfactory  service  which, 
however,  we  urge  to  make  better.  Should 
not  the  cooperative  principle  which  is  at 
the  very  basis  of  the  Canadian  Press, 
Limited,  and  which  makes  her  service 
effective  be  embodied  in  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union?  Countries  having  common  in- 
terests in  the  many  problems  concerning 
the  territories  confined  by  the  Pacific 
Ocean  should  pull  together  and  give 
their  full  cooperation  for  the  common 
welfare. 

^  ^c  ^c 

There  are  surely  great  possibilities  of 
commercial  intercourse  between  the  Ha- 
waiian Islands  and  Canada,  separated 
only  by  water,  and  I  hope  that  the  pres- 
ent congress  of  the  fourth  estate  held  in 
these  islands  shall  contribute  to  stimu- 
late such  intercourse  which  should  be 
profitable  to  all  interested  parties. 

The  Canadian  press  realizes  ihat  the 
Tan-Pacific  Union  is  a  peaceful  organi- 
zation seeking  to  settle  harmoniously  all 
divergencies  of  opinion  among  inter- 
ested   parties    and    she    rallies    to    your 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


61 


colors ;  she  is  willing  to  take  a  glorious 
share  in  your  enlightening  mission. 


On  the  6th  of  September  last,  more 
than  one  hundred  years  of  peace  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Canada  were 
commemorated  by  the  dedication  of  the 
Peace  Portal,  a  huge  arch  of  steel  and 
cement,  on  the  international  boundary 
line  near  Blaine,  Washington.  The 
Peace  Portal  rests  half  on  American  and 
half  on  Canadian  soil.  On  the  south 
side  are  inscribed  the  words :  "Children 
of  a  Common  Mother."     On  the  north 


side  appear  these  words :  "Brethren 
Dwelling  Together  in  Unity."  On  the  in- 
terior, below  one  of  the  doors  can  be 
read :  "Open  for  One  Hundred  Years." 
And  below  the  other  door :  "May  These 
Doors  Never  be  Closed."  The  structure 
bears  two  flag  poles  from  which  fly  the 
Stars  and  Stripes  and  the  Union  Jack. 
During  the  dedication  ceremonies  the 
flags  of  Begium  and  France  were  hoisted. 
Is  not  that  Peace  Portal  an  inspiring 
emblem  of  what  should  be  the  friendly 
relations  between  the  several  nations 
having  some  territory  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean  ? 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Japanese    Press    in    Hawaii 


By   Y.  Soga, 
Editor  Xippit  Jiji. 


The  Japanese  press  in  Hawaii  plays 
an  important  part  in  the  manifold  activ- 
ities of  Hawaii  <\uc  to  the  fact  that  it 
represents  a  large  number  of  Japanese 
residents  who  constitute  a  majority  of 
the  population  of  these  islands.  The 
influence  of  the  Japanese  press,  whether 
in  the  good  direction  or  in  the  bad  di- 
rection, vitally  affects  Hawaii's  interests, 
and  upon  its  attitude  depend  inter- 
racial harmony  and  concord  in  this  in- 
tegral part  of  the  United  States. 

The  Japanese  press  in  Hawaii  is  not  a 
-mall  question,  and  in  treating'  the  ques- 
tion, 1  shall  be  brief,  confining  myself 
to  a  statement  of  principal  facts,  di- 
vided into  past,  present  and  future. 

The  first  Japanese  newspaper  made 
it-  appearance  twenty-nine  years  ago,  in 
1892,  when  Nippon  Shuho  or  Japanese 
Weekly  printed  it-  rirst  sheet  by  a 
mimeograph  machine.  This  publication 
after  -ending  out  a  number  of  editions 
changed  its  title  to  Hawaii  Shuho  or 
Hawaii  Weekly,  with  B.  Onome,  super- 
intendent of  immigration  board  of  Ha- 
waii, as  editor. 

In  1893  another  weekly  newspaper 
came  into  existence,  with  the  title  of 
Hawaii  Shinbun.  It  was  edited  by  Dr. 
I     Uchida   who  published  about   65  edi- 

n-.  A  little  later  another  publication 
came  into  existence.  It  was  called 
Jukuseiki  or  Nineteenth  Century. 

The  appearance  ><\~  the  Jukuseiki  was 
followed  by  the  establishment  of  the 
Hawaii  Shimpo  in  1894,  and  Yamato 
Shinbun,  the  forerunner  of  the  Nippu 
Jiji,  in  1895.  Shin  Nippon  or  New  Ja- 
pan, another  publication  appeared  about 


the  same  time  or  shortly  afterwards.  The 
Yamato  Shinbun  was  first  edited  by  H. 
Mizuno. 

About  the  time  the  Yamato  Shinbun 
and  Hawaii  Shimpo  came  into  being, 
the  mimeograph  machines  were  discard- 
ed and  their  places  were  taken  by  types 
imported  from  Japan.  At  the  same  time 
the  newspapers  changed  their  editions 
from  weekly  to  daily,  gaining  substan- 
tial increase  in  circulation. 

This  was  the  beginning  of  the  Jap- 
anese press  in  Hawaii.  At  the  present 
time  there  are  in  the  whole  territory 
about  twelve  dailies  and  weeklies  and 
several  monthly  periodicals.  The  city  of 
Honolulu  has  four  Japanese  dailies 
which  are  the  Hawaii  Shimpo,  Hawaii 
Hochi,  Hawaii  Nippo  and  the  Nippu 
Jiji.  Hilo  city  has  two  daily  and  one 
weekly  publications,  while  west  1  lawaii 
has  one  weekly;  Koloa,  island  of  Kauai, 
one  weekly:  and  Lihue,  Kauai,  also  one 
weekly.  The  island  of  Maui  has  two 
newspapers,  one  being  semiweekly  and 
the  other  a  weekly  publication. 

Besides  these  newspapers  there  is  the 
Jitsugyo-no-Hawaii,  known  in  the  Knv;- 
lish-speaking  community  as  the  Com- 
mercial and  Industrial  Magazine  of  Ha- 
waii. This  periodical  is  ten  years  old. 
Another  periodical  is  the  Japanese-Amer- 
ican Revieiv  which  will  soon  come  into 
existence  with  objects  to  promote  better 
understanding  between  races  in  these 
islands. 

The  Japanese  newspapers  in  Hawaii. 
like  all  newspapers,  are  striving  for  su- 
premacy. In  the  gathering  and  dissemi- 
nation of  local  news,  in  the  printing  of 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


63 


world  news,  they  arc  engaged  in  keen 
competition.  The  development  of  the 
Japanese  press  in   Honolulu  has  been  so 

rapid  in  recent  years  that  some  of  the 
largest  Japanese  newspapers  published 
outside  of  the  Empire  of  Japan  arc 
found  not  on  the  continental  United 
States  or  in  Korea  or  any  other  country 
where  Japanese  reside,  but  right  here 
in  1  lawaii. 

The  policies  of  the  Japanese  news- 
papers in  I  lawaii.  while  differing  from 
one  another  in  minor  points,  agree  in 
their  essentials.  As  a  part  of  their 
policy  the  Japanese  newspapers  pro- 
pound to  Japanese  residents  in  the  terri- 
tory what  the  Japanese  call  "Eiju  Do- 
chaku"  Or  permanent  residence  in  (la- 
waii. This  policy  is  pursued  by  the  Jap- 
anese press  not  with  any  sinister  motive 
to  secure  control  of  these  islands  or  to 
obtain  dominition  over  other  races,  but 
with  the  idea  of  inducing  the  Japanese 
of  becoming  a  part  of  the  land  of  their 
residence.  The  Japanese  press  believes 
that  the  longer  the  Japanese  live  in  Ha- 
waii, the  more  interested  they  will  be- 
o  'me  in  Hawaii's  affairs  and  thingfs 
American,  and  the  more  they  become  to 
know  about  America  the  better  it  is  for 
the  Americanization  of  themselves  and 
their  children. 

The  life  of  the  Japanese  press  in  Ha- 
waii will  not  he  long.  The  steady  in- 
crease in  the  English-speaking  Japanese 
educated  in  America  and  the  decrease  of 
the  older  Japanese  generation  speaking 
the  Japanese  language  will  make  the 
publication  of  Japanese  newspaper  an 
unpaying  proposition  within  twenty-five 
years  or  so.  ' 

In  this  connection  it  might  be  inter- 
esting to  mention  that  the  Japanese  press 
in  Hawaii  is  advocating  the  use  of 
Romanized  Japanese  which  makes  it  pos- 
sible for  Japanese  writers  to  convey 
their  sentiment  in  Japanese  phraseologies 
reduced  in  Roman  letters. 


In  order  that  there  may  he  a  better 
understanding  between  Americans  and 
Japanese  in  I  lawaii,  one  of  the  Jap- 
anese newspapers  in  Honolulu,  The  Nip- 
pu  Jiji,  publishes  its  editorials  and  news 
articles  in  Japanese  as  well  as  in  Eng- 
lish, giving  the  English-speaking  com- 
munity a  comprehensive  view  of  what 
takes  place  in  the  Japanese  community 
even-  day.  The  Hawaii  Shimpo,  an- 
other Honolulu  daily,  has  also  recently 
started  to  publish  its  leading  editorials 
once  a  week,  in  the  English  language, 
which  is  very  commendable. 

The  English  section  of  the  Nippu  Jiji 
is  largely  devoted  to  promoting  under- 
standing between  Japanese  and  Ameri- 
can communities,  and  also  to  the  pro- 
motion of  interest  of  Japanese  children 
growing  up  into  American  citizens.  In 
the  beginning  this  section  was  not  so 
popular  as  it  was  expected,  the  criticism 
being  that  it  was  too  much  for  the 
Nippu  Jiji,  which  is  an  eight-page  news- 
paper, to  devote  a  page  for  English  news 
items.  However,  this  criticism  has  now 
entirely  disappeared,  parents  of  Japanese 
children  finding  it  a  valuable  source  of 
information  for  their  children  who  pre- 
fer to  read  and  speak  English  rather 
than  Japanese. 

The  A"//1/1//  Jiji  has  grown  from  a 
small  printing  plant  having  a  circulation 
of  a  few  hundred  copies  to  a  large  print- 
ing establishment  holding  the  leading 
place  among  the  Japanese  press  in  Ha- 
waii. It  holds  membership  in  the  Asso- 
ciated Tress  through  whose  services  its 
readers  are  given  reports  of  up-to-date 
world  events.  Its  cable  despatches  from 
Tokyo  are  noted  for  accuracy  and 
promptitude. 

The  Japanese  press  of  Hawaii  has 
been,  and  is  still  to  some  extent,  very 
unpopular  among  certain  elements  in  the 
American  community.  The  unpopularity 
was    at    its    height    a    year    or    two    ago 


64                        FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

when  an  unfortunate  event   unavoidably  alien  Japanese  population  shall  have  at- 

took  place  in  Hawaii.  tained  such  a  degree  of  Americanization 

The  popular  belief  among  the  white  that  its  assistance  is  no  longer  needed, 
people  seems  to  be  that  the  Japanese  \n  support  of  the  statement  that  the 
press  allows  anything  to  appear  in  its  Japanese  press  is  a  valuable  factor  in  the 
columns  because  no  one,  except  the  Jap-  uplift  of  Hawaii,  let  me  cite  some  of 
ancse,  knows  what  is  being  said.  This  the  many  instances  of  patriotic  work  it 
is  untrue.  Responsible  newspapers  con-  has  performed.  When  the  European 
trol  their  utterances,  though  at  times,  war  started  it  was  the  Japanese  press 
they  become  irrelevant  in  an  unguarded  through  the  Japanese  language  that  suc- 
moment.  They  are  perfectly  aware  of  cessfully  urged  the  Japanese  residents 
the  fact  that  what  is  being  said  in  Jap-  to  enlist  in  the  United  States  army,  to 
anese  is  rapidly  communicated  to  the  buy  Liberty  Bonds  and  War  Savings 
American  community.  The  Nip  pit  Jiji,  Stamps.  It  enlisted  the  support  of  the 
for  one,  prints  in  the  Japanese  as  well  Japanese  in  American  Red  Cross  work 
as  in  the  English  language  what  actually  and  other  patriotic  services,  and  what 
takes  place  in  the  Japanese  community,  they  have  done,  in  my  opinion,  cannot  be 
withholding  or  camouflaging  nothing,  successfully  contradicted  by  any  one. 
This  honesty  is  sometimes  criticized  by  We  have  in  Hawaii  a  press  law  en- 
its  Japanese  contemporaries,  but  the  acted  by  the  1921  territorial  legislature 
Nip  pit  Jiji  could  not  justify  itself  if  it  for  the  primary  purpose  of  controlling 
concealed  or  suppressed  facts  just  be-  the  utterances  of  the  foreign  language 
cause  they  are  unpleasant.  press.     While  this  law  has  been  enacted 

In  spite  of  all  what  may  be  said  particularly  for  the  control  of  Japanese 
against  the  Japanese  press,  it  must  be  newspapers  in  Hawaii,  we  hope  it  will 
conceded  that  it  is  a  valuable  factor  in  never  find  application  to  any  of  the 
the  Americanization  work  of  the  alien  newspapers  in  the  territory. 
Japanese  population  of  the  islands  which  The  future  of  America  as  a  nation 
is  dominating  any  other  single  race  as  depends  in  an  important  degree  upon 
far  as  number  is  concerned.  The  ma-  the  measure  of  success  Americans 
jority  of  the  Japanese  in  Hawaii  do  not  achieve  in  uniting  all  the  racial  strains 
speak  or  read  the  English  language,  into  a  single  racial  element — the  Ameri- 
They  must  rely  upon  the  Japanese  press  can — with  a  single  American  aim  with  a 
for  the  day's  information  relating  to  single  American  ideal.  And  Hawaii 
practically  everything,  from  the  enact-  cannot  afford  to  alienate  the  Japanese 
ment  of  new  laws  down  to  the  social  press  by  setting  up  against  them  a  bar- 
customs,  if  they  are  to  conform  as  best  rier  of  prejudice  and  undeserved  suspi- 
as  they  can  to  the  requirements  of  the  cion  when  they  can  be  used  to  mix  the 
country  of  their  residence.  The  Japanese  Japanese  racial  strain  into  American 
press  is  necessary  until  such  time  as  the  race. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


65 


A   Message   from   the   Chinese   Press 


Jabin    Hsu 

Representative  of  the  Newspaper  Association  of  Shanghai 

and  the  Chinese  Press,  Shanghai. 


The  press  of  the  Pacific  Countries  has 
come  to  play  an  important  role  in  the 
regeneration  of  the  intellectual  life  of 
China.  Contact  with  other  nations  shat- 
ters the  crust  of  China's  provincial 
journalism  and  induces  mutation  and 
progress  in  the  journalistic  activities. 
As  it  has  been  in  Japanese  newspaper- 
dom,  so  it  is  in  China.  Contact  with 
the  West,  especially  America,  has 
brought  in  new  ideas,  new  forces  and 
new  influences,  which  are  helping  to 
guide  the  public  opinion  of  China's  vast 
populace.  In  the  journalistic  develop- 
ment, China  is  in  a  transition  from  the 
old  to  the  new,  from  the  conservative  to 
the  progressive,  like  her  other  phases 
of  national   life. 

During  this  period  of  transition,  we 
are  looking  to  our  neighbors  on  the 
Pacific  for  sympathetic  guidance  and 
support  and  to  a  certain  extent  we  have 
succeeded.  We  are  copying  all  the 
methods  of  news  gathering,  editing  and 
advertising,  which  our  big  brothers  have 
wisely  adopted  through  trying  experi- 
ences. On  account  of  her  youth  as  a 
factor  in  the  intellectual  life  of  a  na- 
tion, China  has  for  some  considerable 
extent  allowed  herself  to  be  led  by  the 
opinions  of  the  Pacific  newspapers  and 
news  agencies.  During  the  world  war. 
newspapermen  in  China  devoured  every- 
thing that  the  foreign  press  chose  to 
feed  the  Orient  but  the  news  reports 
concerning  the  international  relationship 
of  China  as  conveyed  by  the  foreign 
agencies  had  their  own  purposes  to 
serve.  In  their  contact  with  the  Pa- 
cific press,  the  Chinese  pressmen  placed 


unreserved  confidence  in  the  columns  of 
the  newspapers  circulated  in  the  coun- 
tries bordering  the  great  ocean  and  the 
daily  dispatches  furnished  by  news 
agencies  of  these  countries. 

When  peace  was  proclaimed,  news- 
papers in  China  unanimously  predicted 
disarmament  and  the  elimination  of 
secret  diplomacy,  because  the  press  of 
the  Pacific  had  repeatedly  declared  that 
the  late  war  was  fought  in  the  interest 
of  justice  and  humanity.  The  Chinese 
press  at  that  time  merely  reproduced 
the  promises  made  by  the  statesmen  of 
the  day  through  the  Pacific  press  and 
other  machines  of  publicity.  Three  long 
years  have  elapsed  and  Chinese  today 
discovered  that  they  have  been  misled, 
intentionally  or  unintentionally,  we  are 
not  here  to  discuss.  Chinese  journalists 
have  now  realized  that  press  dispatches 
from  their  foreign  colleagues  were  dis- 
tributed with  ulterior  motives  and  that 
the  truth  of  the  conditions  of  the  na- 
tions of  the  world  was  not  honestly  told 
in  the  Far  East.  Some  believed  that 
the  foreign  press  organizations  are 
merely  weapons  in  the  hands  of  their 
respective  diplomats. 

Inconsistency,  of  course,  is  the  great- 
est impeachment  with  which  the  press 
of  China  today  charges  the  press  of  the 
Pacific,  for  did  not  the  statesmen  of 
Europe  and  America  declare  through 
their  own  press  that  the  war  was  to  end 
all  future  conflicts  and  that  upon  its 
successful  prosecution,  each  and  every 
person  would  be  given  a  decent  chance 
to  enjoy   life,   property  and  the  pursuit 


66  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

of  happiness.  If  the  Pacific  press  ex-  cine  press  should  be  clean,  consistent 
pects  to  enjoy  the  confidence  of  us  all,  and  truthful  more  than  any  other  see- 
the Chinese  journalists  say.  it  should  tion  of  the  world  press  is  more  than  ap- 
be  at   least   consistent:   it   should  review  parent. 

the  utterance  and  declaration  of  the  with  the  resn\ts  0f  tne  Versailles 
figures  of  world  importance  as  it  pub-  Conference  still  vividly  lingering  in  our 
lishes  new  facts  about  them.  If  the  minds,  the  nations  of  the  earth  are 
press  of  the  Pacific  is  to  lead  the  opin-  :ij)OUt  to  undergo  another  experiment  to 
ion  of  the  Orient,  it  must  necessarily  soive  the  pacjfic  problems  without  re- 
exercise  such  vigilance  and  supervision  sortjng  t0  arms  The  tjme  js  opportune 
as  are  required  from  time  to  time  to  for  the  journaijsts  0f  the  Pacific  to  see 
check  the  inconsistent  words  and  acts  to  it  that  the  tragedy  0f  tne  Versailles 
of  the  world  politicians.  Under  such  conference  is  not  reproduced.  It  is  well 
circumstances  and  only  under  such  cir-  withjn  tne  pOWer  of  the  Pacific  press  to 
cumstances  can  the  world  be  free  from  ayert  the  comjng-  strike.  Secret  diplo- 
propaganda,  so  expressively  termed  the  macy>  intrigu-e  and  entangling  alliance 
"hookworm  of  journalism".  liave  DUt  one  remedy  :  the  bitter  pill  of 
The  comment  of  the  Chinese  press  on  white  publicity.  The  statesmen  who  are 
the  Pacific  press,  though  somewhat  too  going  to  participate  in  this  coming  con- 
severe,  is  but  the  outcome  of  the  dis-  ference,  like  those  at  the  Versailles  Con- 
eased  seeds  sowed  by  the  foreign  jour-  ference,  have  announced  to  the  world 
nalists  themselves  and  they  have  only  through  the  press  their  intention  of  re- 
themselves  to  thank  for.  But  in  order  Heving  mankind  of  that  terrible  burden 
to  secure  the  confidence  and  hence  sym-  0f  deprivation  for  the  increase  of  arma- 
pathic  support  of  the  Oriental  news-  ment  an(j  0f  giving  all  the  nations, 
paperdom,  the  foreign  press  should  whether  strong  or  weak,  a  square  deal 
tell  "the  truth,  the  whole  truth  and  at  the  conference  table.  The  same 
nothing  but  the  truth."  A  press  devoid  pie(jge,  it  will  be  remembered,  was  made 
of  propaganda  and  colored  news,  or  by  fche  participants  of  the  Versailles 
"handouts"  and  aimed  for  the  welfare  Conference  before  its  sessions.  I  trust 
of  the  Pacific  as  well  as  the  world  1S  ^                        en   of   the   Pacific 

the  call  of  the  Orient.    The  faithful  per-  .„«-,..     ,                •       ^    ■          nt.ama 

,            ,            ,       ,,       t>     :£„  will    effectively    exercise    their    supreme 

formance    of    its    duties   by    the    Pacific  J    . 

press  during  the  world  crisis  as  is  ex-  fu»^on  of  makinS  the  statesmen  make 

isting   today    will    accomplish    much    to  good    their   promises    and    prevent    that 

disperse  the  war  clouds  which  even  to-  great  catastrophe  which  must  follow  if 

■  lay  hang  darkly  over  our  horizon.  Such  a  revocation  of  the  Versailes   Confer- 

being  the  case,  the  reason  why  the  Pa-  ence  takes  place. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE.  67 

Journalism   in   Korea 


f.  Yamagata, 
Editor  "Soul  Press". 

I  am  a  Japanese  and  have  come  from  the  price  to  only  a  half  a  dollar  i 
Seoul  in  Korea  where  1  am  the  pro-  month  a  few  years  ago  and  though  this 
prietor  and  editor  of  a  little  daily  paper  trebled  the  circulation  of  the  Seoul 
called  the  Seoul  Press.  Although  my  Press  1  am  not  getting  so  much  profit 
paper  is  a  humble  publication  of  only  as  I  did  before.  This  makes  me  think 
four  pages,  yet  Dr.  Williams,  the  Pres-  that  we  journalists  should  combine  >ur- 
ident  of  the  World  Press  Congress,  selves  to  maintain  a  reasonably  high 
when  he  visited  Korea  several  years  ago  price  for  our  papers.  Newspapers  are 
took  notice  of  it  and  afterwards  in  a  now  a  thing  of  necessity,  as  indispens- 
pamphlet  he  prepared  on  the  press  of  able  as  our  daily  food.  They  are  a 
the  world,  included  it  among  the  hun-  necessity,  or  it  may  be  a  necessary  evil, 
dred  representative  papers  of  the  world.  People  simply  cannot  do  without  them. 
I  am  not  so  self-conceited  as  to  think  Why  should  not  we  ask  from  them  for 
that  Dr.  Williams  gave  my  paper  this  more  pay  for  our  work  and  labor. 
distinction  and  honor  because  it  was  a  As  I  said,  I  have  come  from  Korea, 
good  standard  journal.  On  the  contrary  a  country  which  is  still  little  known  by 
mine  is  very  poor  stuff,  containing  not  the  people  of  the  rest  of  the  world, 
much  cablegrams  and  highly  paid  spe-  If  any  of  you,  ladies  and  gentlemen, 
cial  articles  and  giving  only  local  news  would  like  to  know  about  the  real  con- 
written  in  the  poorest  English.  Never-  dition  of  Korea  I  should  only  be  too 
theless  it  is  the  only  daily  paper  pub-  glad  to  supply  you  with  correct  infor- 
lished  in  English  in  the  whole  of  the  mation  as  best  as  I  can.  As  this  is  a 
Korean  peninsula  and  besides  at  the  congress  of  journalists,  permit  me,  how- 
time  Dr.  Williams  visited  Seoul  it  was  ever,  to  tell  you  something  about  jour- 
the  highest  priced  paper  in  the  world,  nalism  in  Korea.  It  is  charged  that  the 
the  monthly  subscription  being  one  dol-  Japanese  government  restricts  the  free- 
lar  and  a  quarter  gold.  These  two,  I  dom  of  the  press.  This  charge  is  true 
think,  are  the  reasons  which  induced  or  to  a  certain  extent.  No  cities  except 
compelled  Dr.  Williams  to  mention  the  such  big  cities  as  Seoul  and  Fusan  were 
name  of  my  paper  in  the  list  of  a  hun-  permitted  to  have  more  than  one  news- 
dred  great  papers  of  the  world.  Our  paper.  In  other  words,  one  paper  for 
distinguished  president  was  simply  one  city  was  the  rule.  This  policy  was 
forced  to  give  my  paper  the  Seoul  Press  enforced  by  the  government  partly  for 
this  great  honor  for  there  was  no  other  political  reasons  and  partly  in  considera- 
competitor  in  the  field  for  the  laurel.  tion    of    the    interest    of    the    people    at 

By  the  way.  a  few  years  ago  I  was  large.  For  some  time  after  the  annex- 
obliged  to  abandon  the  distinction  of  ation  of  Korea  by  Japan  was  carried 
publishing  the  highest  priced  paper  in  out,  there  prevailed  much  political  un- 
the  world.  I  was^  constantly  assailed  by  rest,  which  induced  the  authorities  to 
my  readers  with  complaints  against  the  think  it  prudent  and  expedient  to  con- 
high  price  of  my  paper  and  with  de-  trol  the  press.  At  the  same  time  the 
mands  for  a  reduction  of  it.     I  lowered  authorities  thought   it  beneficial  to   the 


68  FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

people  at  large,  not  to  permit  the  publi-  men,  it  is  a  great  help  to  the  govern- 
cation  of  too  many  newspapers,  because  merit  because  through  its  columns  the 
when  there  arc  many  newspapers  pub-  authorities  can  sound  and  learn  the  de- 
lished  in  a  small  place  it  is  always  the  sires  and  ideas  of  the  Korean  people, 
public  that  suffer  much  in  consequence  so  that  they  may  frame  such  a  policy 
of  the  competition  and  struggles  for  of  administration  as  will  please  them 
existence  between  them.  Keen  can-  and  promote  their  general  interest, 
vassing  for  soliciting  advertisements  and  Journalism  in  Korea  is  still  in  its 
subscriptions  must  be  kept  up  so  that  young  days  of  development.  There  are 
they  may  live  on  and  the  result  is  that  published  in  Seoul,  capital  of  the  penin- 
the  general  public  are  victimized.  sula,  three  Korean,  three  Japanese  and 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  before  annexation  one  English  dailies,  besides  a  number 
Seoul  had  four  or  five  Japanese  and  of  monthly  magazines,  Japanese  and 
four  Korean  daily  papers,  all  of  which  Korean.  In  the  provinces  about  a  dozen 
were  but  poorly  supported  and  had  to  daily  papers  are  published.  Most  of 
live,  so  to  speak,  from  hand  to  mouth,  those  metropolitan  and  provincial  papers 
The  result  was  that  not  a  few  instances  are  rather  poor  stuff  and  their  financial 
occurred  in  which  the  public  were  conditions  are  anything  but  good.  The 
made  to  lose.  In  view  of  this  evil  the  Korean  masses  are  still  too  ignorant 
government  put  restriction  on  the  num-  and  too  poor  to  be  able  to  support  any 
her  of  newspapers  making  one  news-  big  papers,  in  running  which  much 
paper  for  one  city  a  general  rule.  This  capital  is  needed.  Besides,  Korea  being 
policy,  as  you  will  see,  was  taken  with  an  agricultural  country  and  her  com- 
the  best  of  intentions,  but  I  do  not  merce  and  manufacturing  industries  be- 
think it  was  a  wise  one.  The  govern-  ing  still  undeveloped,  the  papers  in 
ment  should  have  left  the  matter  alone,  that  country  cannot  as  yet  collect  many 
leaving  the  public  to  manage  it  by  itself,  advertisements  and  cannot  obtain  any 
The  government  was  too  paternal  and  big  income  from  that  source.  Both  sub- 
tins  was  resented  by  the  public.  The  scription  and  advertising  rates  are  low 
government  has  since  seen  its  error  in  and  editors  are  very  poorly  paid.  As  I 
this  respect.  said,  the  Donga  Ilpo  is  the  Korean 
Two  years  ago  when  the  Government-  paper  enjoying  the  largest  circulation, 
General  of  Korea  was  reformed  and  re-  issuing,  as  I  understand,  some  forty 
organized,  one  of  the  first  things  the  thousand  copies  a  day.  Even  this  paper, 
new  authorities  did  was  to  permit  the  however,  cannot  be  said  to  be  finan- 
publication  of  three  Korean  and  two  cially  very  well  off.  As  I  understand, 
Japanese  newspapers  in  Seoul.  One  of  it  is  run  with  little  or  no  profit, 
the  Korean  newspapers  is  here  repre-  Nevertheless,  the  Korean  papers  have  a 
sented  by  my  friend  Mr.  Kim.  His  great  future.  Education  is  rapidly 
paper  is  Donga  Ilpo,  or  Eastern  Asia  spreading  among  Korea's  rising  genera- 
I Knly  News.  It  is  the  best  paper  with  tion  and  along  with  the  economic  ad- 
the  largest  circulation  in  Korea,  being  vance  the  people  are  steadily  making 
edited  by  some  of  Korea's  best  edu-  today,  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  num- 
cated  young  men.  It  is  a  great  educa-  ber  of  people  reading  newspapers  will 
tional  power  and  influential  moulder  of  increase  and  correspondingly  the  posi- 
Korean  public  opinion,  and  though  its  tion  of  the  press  and  of  those  engaged 
utterances  occasionally  displease  the  in  it  will  be  improved. 
Japanese  authorities,  as  outspoken  and  I  thank  you  all  for  listening  to  my 
radical  opinions  of  young  men  do  older  poor  paper. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


69 


The   Newspaper   in   Korea 


I).  S.  Kim 

The  Dong-A  Daily,  Seoul,  Korea. 
i  Read  by  Guy  Innes.) 


The  average  English  reader  knows 
little  of  the  Korean  newspaper  in  the 
making.  It  is  a  happy  occasion  to  in- 
form this  great  gathering  briefly  how 
the  modern  Korean  paper  is  turned  out. 

Koreans  use  the  Chinese  characters 
as  well  as  the  alphabet  or  the  phonetic 
syllabary,  which  is  composed  of  eleven 
vowels  and  fourteen  consonants  which 
is  considered  the  simplest  written  lang- 
uage in  the  world.  Anybody  can  learn 
to  read  and  write  within  a  week.  For 
this  reason  there  is  no  illiteracy  in 
Korea,  but  a  Korean  journalist  must  be 
a  scholar  in  Chinese  classics  which  form 
the  basis  of  all  written  language  in  the 
Orient.  The  English  papers  have  pass- 
ed the  stage  when  the  reading  public  en- 
joyed a  long  editorial,  but  in  Korea  it 
is  still  in  demand. 

History  tells  us  that  the  Koreans  in- 
vented the  iron  movable  types  long  be- 
fore Gutenberg ;  those  old  types  are 
still  kept  at  the  royal  museum  today. 
The  Korean  alphabet  has  been  already 
adapted  to  the  linotype  with  which  the 
Koreans  in  America  are  publishing  their 
papers,  but  on  account  of  the  Chinese 
characters  it  is  not  practicable  in  Korea. 

Now,  take  the  Dong-A  Daily,  the 
leading  newspaper  in  Korea,  it  has  four 
pages  with  sixteen  members  on  the  edi- 
torial staff  which  is  too  crowded  for  an 
English  paper  of  the  same  size.  One 
might  criticise  for  the  waste  of  labor, 
but  atcually  the  writing  is  all  done  by 
hand,  and  it  must  be  carried  out  by  a 
bigger  force  than  an  English  paper. 
The  manuscript  papers  are  ruled  so  as 


to  write  one  word  in  each  square  space 
by  which  means  the  man  in  the  compos- 
ing room  may  know  how  many  words 
to  the  line  or  the  whole  article  at  a 
glance. 

The  Korean  language  is  like  the 
Chinese,  read  up  and  down  and  from 
right  to  left,  so  the  first  page  is  really 
the  last  of  a  four-page  paper.  It  is  a 
decided  rule,  that  each  page  has  its 
separate  departments :  The  first  page  is 
editorial,  by  all  means  the  most  im- 
portant ;  the  second,  telegrams,  politics 
and  commercial  news;  the  third,  the  so- 
cial or  city  news,  the  written  picture  of 
Korean  life;  and  the  fourth  page  has 
fiction  and  correspondence  from  all 
corners  of  the  nation.  Advertisements 
go  at  the  foot  of  the  first  and  last 
pages.  The  third  page  is  written  en- 
tirely by  the  Korean  alphabet,  that  at- 
tracts more  readers  than  the  other  con- 
servative pages. 

The  Dong-A  Daily  has  a  rotary  press 
that  turns  out  twenty  thousand  copies 
per  hour,  and  the  press  rolls  almost 
three  hours  daily  to  turn  out  fifty  thou- 
sand copies  that  reach  every  corner 
and  nook  of  the  country. 

The  local  news  is  gathered  by  re- 
porters who  have  been  assigned  to  cer- 
tain places  and  also  by  news  agencies, 
but  the  foreign  news  is  supplied  by  the 
Reuter  and  Kokusai,  that  tell  very  little 
about  the  news  of  the  different  races 
bordering  the  Pacific. 

The  Koreans  want  to  know  more 
about  the  news  concerning  the  Pacific. 
In  view  of  this  fact  the  Dong-A  Daily 


70 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


lias  been  rendering  all  possible  assist- 
ance and  publicity  to  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union,  so  today  the  name  of  Mr.  Alex- 
ander I  [time  Ford,  our  esteemed  chair- 
man of  the  conference,  is  as  well  known 
to  the  Koreans  as  to  the  Hawaiians,  and 
the   full   report  of  the  first  educational 


conference  proceedings  ha-s  been  pub- 
lished and  now  the  Dong- A  Daily  is 
represented  at  the  first  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Conference,  at  the  threshold  of  a 
new  era,  may  we  hope  that  we  know 
each  other  better  than  ever  before  by 
the  efforts  of  this  conference. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


71 


Journalism   in   Australia 


By  J.   E.   Davidson 

Managing     Director    of    "The     Barrier 

Miner",  Broken  Hill,  Australia,  and  first 

president  of  the   Australian   Journalists' 

Association. 


Eight    hundred    and    forty-five    news- 
papers supply  Australia's  five  and  a  half 
millions  of  people  with  news  and  jour- 
nalistic   comment.      Australian    journal- 
ism   compares    favorably    with    that    in 
any  other  part  of  the  globe.     From  the 
editorial  and  commercial  points  of  view, 
the    bulk    of    the    newspapers    are    ably 
conducted.     In  a  social  system  in  which 
the    newspaper    must    necessarily    be    a 
commercial  success  in  order  to  live,  they 
maintain  the  highest  ideals.     There  has 
never   been   ground,   so    far  as   I   know, 
for    suspicion    that    any    newspaper    of 
standing  has   ever  been   actuated   in   its 
policy   or   advocacy    by    self-seeking   or 
corrupt   motives.      Bribery   of   the   Aus- 
tralian press  is  unheard  of.     Its  honesty 
of    purpose    is    beyond    question.      The 
leading   and  .special   articles   are    vigor- 
ously written.     The  news  on  the  whole 
is   set   out   fairly   and   impartially.       The 
style    employed    is    generally    crisp    and 
pithy,  but  without  any  attempt  at  elab- 
orate   display.      In    the    last    ten    years 
the    evening    newspapers,    which     have 
made  rapid  progress,  have  to  some  ex- 
tent   broken    away    from    the    unwritten 
law    in    regard    to    the    non-display    of 
news,  but  the  morning  papers  still   rig- 
idly  conform   to   it.     In  the   same   way, 
the  evening  newspapers  have  abandoned 
the  practice  of  excluding  pictorial   feat- 
ures.     Several    of    the    most    successful 
evening  papers   are   now    following   the 
example  set  by   the   American   press   in 
that  respect.     ( )n   special  occasions  the 


morning  papers  use  photographic  work, 
but  not  so  generally  as  their  evening 
contemporaries.  Line  illustrations  as 
used  in  the  United  States  are  rarely 
seen  in  Australian  newspapers. 

A  lack  of  humor  is  perhaps  one  of 
the  outstanding  features  of  Australian 
journalism.  (  )ne  rarely  gets  a  laugh 
out  of  our  daily  press,  unless  it  be  a 
laugh  at  the  intense  seriousness  of 
some  of  the  political  articles.  Conscious 
humor  is  studiously  avoided,  so  studi- 
ously avoided,  that  not  infrequently  un- 
conscious humor  is  abundantly  present. 
The  Australian  newspapers  were  orig- 
inally modelled  on  the  British  type  of 
journalism,  to  which  type  they  still 
closely  adhere.  True  to  the  British 
type,  the  Australian  journalism  is  staid, 
weighty  and  serious.  It  worships  at 
the  shrine  of  dignity,  and  therefore  in 
many  of  the  leading  daily  newspapers 
humor  is  taboo.  That  is  not  to  say 
there  are  no  humorists  among  Austra- 
lian newspaper  men.  As  a  fact,  there 
is  as  high  a  percentage  of  them  on  the 
ink)'  way  under  the  Southern  Cross  as 
among  journalists  elsewhere,  but  most 
of  the  witty  newspaper  matter  and 
headings  are  only  published  in  clubs  or 
other  places  where  the  Australian  news- 
paper men  congregate.  Several  bright 
writers  in  Australia  have,  at  different 
times,  nearly  lost  their  jobs,  because  in 
unguarded  moments,  they  let  a  joke 
creep  into  their  "copy". 


72 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


On  this  phase  of  journalism  many 
proprietors  and  managers  have  a  per- 
fect horror  of  what  they  call  "Ameri- 
canizing" their  newspapers.  A  remon- 
strance to  one  manager  in  respect  to 
the  dull  seriousness  of  his  newspaper 
drew  the  remark,  "My  dear  fellow,  dull- 
ness and  seriousness  pay  me.  Tell  me 
how  to  make  my  paper  more  solemn 
and  serious  and  I'll  listen  to  you."  And 
there  was  wisdom  in  that  apparent 
topsyturvy  observation.  There  is  noth- 
ing the  Australian  public  resent  more 
quickly  or  more  emphatically  than  in- 
novations in  its  newspapers. 

The  Australian  newspaper  reader  likes 
his  paper  to  have  exactly  the  same  ap- 
pearance from  day  to  day.  He  wishes 
to  find  its  several  features — the  wool 
market,  the  mining'  news,  the  financial 
articles,  the  cabled  and  local  news — all 
in  precisely  the  same  part  of  the  paper 
each  day.  Further,  he  expects  all  the 
reports  and  articles  to  follow  a  stereo- 
typed form.  For  that  reason  what  is 
called  the  "lead"  in  American  journal- 
ism is  unknown  in  Australia.  In  Aus- 
tralia a  newspaper  story  must  start  at 
the  "beginning"  and  work  up  to  a  cli- 
max like  the  old  three-volume  novel.  A 
police  court  story  must  first  of  all  set 
out  when  and  where  the  court  was  held. 
who  occupied  the  bench,  the  name  of 
the  accused,  and  the  charge.  The  evi- 
dence tendered  in  the  case  must  follow 
in  the  order  submitted,  and  the  fate  of 
the  person  concerned  must  be  carefully 
concealed  until  the  last  paragraph  is 
written  ;  unless  perchance  it  is  disclosed 
in  the  headline.  In  the  case  of  one 
newspaper  which  departed  from  that 
formula  the  managing  editor  received 
numerous  letters  from  readers  to  the 
effect  that  they  objected  to  him  turn- 
ing "all  the  reports  in  the  paper  unside- 
down." 

Until  the  Australian  States  federated 
and    the    Commonwealth    of    Australia 


was  created,  the  newspapers  devoted  an 
inordinate  amount  of  space  to  politic!;. 
This  again  was  one  of  the  journalistic 
traditions  handed  down  from  the  British 
type.  The  political  writers  were  always 
the  best  paid  men,  and  the  editors  of 
the  great  daily  newspapers  were  selected 
mainly  on  their  political  acumen.  In 
those  days  most  of  the  work  in  what 
Americans  call  the  "human  interest" 
domain  was  entrusted  to  the  junior 
members  of  the  staffs.  While  the  States 
remained  entirely  separate  entities,  the 
big  metropolitan  newspapers  wielded 
enormous  political  power,  and  on  that 
power  they  flourished  in  a  financial 
sense. 

Over  fifty  percent  of  the  Australian 
population  is  centered  in  the  State  cap- 
ital cities,  and  that  enabled  the  great 
newspapers  to  build  up  their  immense 
political  influence.  Each  paper  strove 
to  become  a  sort  of  political  director, 
and  the  more  powerful  of  them  were 
indeed  able  to  make  and  unmake  State 
Ministries  at  their  own  sweet  wills.  The 
success  of  these  papers  led  others  to 
strive  after  similar  effects,  with  the 
result  that  the  real  news  side  of  journal- 
ism was  neglected.  The  aim  of  every 
proprietor  was  to  make  his  publication, 
not  a  first-class  newspaper,  but  what 
some  were  pleased  to  term  an  "organ". 
In  other  words,  a  force  in  the  formation 
of  public  opinion. 

When  the  Commonwealth  was  inau- 
gurated, however,  national  matters  be- 
gan to  overshadow  State  affairs.  Aus- 
tralia on  a  whole  displaced  the  indi- 
vidual States  in  the  minds  of  the  peo- 
ple. Realizing  that  fact,  the  newspapers 
began  to  devote  less  space  to  State  poli- 
tics and  more  to  Commonwealth  politics  ; 
but  they  had  not  nearly  the  same  in- 
fluence of  power  over  the  Federal  (Com- 
monwealth) Parliament  or  in  Federal 
political  matters  as  they  had  enjoyed  in 
State     matters.        This     was     inevitable. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


73 


The  big  metropolitan  newspapers,  while 
all-powerful  in  their  own  States,  could 
do  nothing  to  influence  the  electors  of 
other  States,  simply  because  they  have 
no  circulation  there.  Therefore,  since 
the  establishment  of  the  Commonwealth 
in  1900  the  newspapers  have'  devoted 
much  more  attention  to  general  news 
as  distinguished  from  political  news. 

In  the  early  days  of  Australian  jour- 
nalism the  newspapers  were  divided  in 
the  political  field  along  a  line  some- 
what similar  to  that  existing  in  Great 
Britain.  They  belonged  to  one  of  two 
groups — Conservative  or  Liberal.  The 
Conservative  papers  stood  for  the  pres- 
ervation of  vested  interests,  chiefly 
those  of  the  landed  proprietors,  men 
who  had  come  to  the  new  land  from 
Great  Britain  and  taken  up  large  areas 
of  pastoral  country.  These  men  were, 
and  still  are,  known  as  "squatters".  On 
the  other  hand,  the  Liberal  newspapers 
favored  the  breaking  up  of  the  holdings 
of  the  squatters  into  small  areas  with 
the  object  of  absorbing  the  population 
which  had  been  attracted  to  Australia 
by  the  gold  discoveries,  and  in  other  to 
provide  land  for  other  immigrants. 

Later  on,  as  secondary  industries  be- 
gan to  grow  up,  the  division  was  along 
the  fiscal  issue,  except  in  New  South 
Wales,  the  Australian  home  of  free 
trade.  The  Conservative  newspapers 
took  up  the  cudgels  on  behalf  of  free 
trade  and  the  importing  interests,  while 
the  Liberal  journals  supported  a  policy 
of  protection  for  the  new  industries.  In 
this  battle  the  Liberal  papers  eventually 
won  a  decisive  victory.  In  the  first  two 
Commonwealth  Parliamentary  elections 
after  the  States  had  federated,  the  free 
trade  party  was  completely  routed,  since 
then,  the  fiscal  issue  has  played  a  very 
insignificant  part  in  Australian  journal- 
ism. Even  in  New  South  Wales  the 
contest  against  the  policy  of  protection 
has  been  abandoned. 


Meanwhile,  as  secondary  industries 
had  multiplied,  there  had  grown  up  in 
the  big  cities,  almost  unneeded  by  the 
newspapers,  a  large  wage-earning  popu- 
lation— artisans  and  factory  operatives. 
That  class  of  the  population  was  aug- 
mented by  the  masses  of  unskilled  la- 
borers, created  and  encouraged  to  re- 
main unskilled  by  the  expenditure  by 
the  State  Governments  of  enormous 
sums  of  loan  money  borrowed  from 
Great  Britain.  The  steady  growth  of 
this  proletarian  population  silently 
worked  a  tremendous  change  in  the 
political  thought  of  Australia,  which 
again  had  its  effect  on  political  journal- 
ism. For  a  time  the  proletarian  class 
swung  in  behind  the  Liberal  Party,  as  it 
did  in  Great  Britain  for  nearly  two  cen- 
turies. This  meant  a  vast  accession  of 
power  to  the  Liberal  newspapers.  But 
about  1890 — the  year  of  the  great  hard- 
fought  strike  in  the  shipping  industry 
in  Australia — the  proletarian  of  work- 
ing class  population  began  to  organize 
a  political  party  of  its  own.  This  be- 
came, and  is  still,  known  as  the  Aus- 
tralian Labor  Party.  It  was  at  the 
time  wholly  without  newspaper  support. 
For  ten  years  the  work  of  organization 
went  on  steadily,  and  ultimately  changed 
the  whole  aspect  of  Australian  political 
journalism. 

Conservative  and  Liberal  newspaper-, 
which  had  hitherto  been  fiercely  fighting 
each  other,  began  to  find  a  common 
cause  in  hostility  to  the  new  party  and 
its  socialistic  policy.  Almost  uncon- 
sciously, they  joined  forces  to  oppose 
sternly  the  now  rapidly  rising  party. 
There  was  still  here  and  there  a  slight 
difference  in  the  ton  eadopted  toward 
certain  measures  proposed  by  the  Labor 
Party,  but  in  the  broad  sense  both  Con- 
servative and  Liberal  journals  were 
unanimously  anti-Labor.  Despite  their 
combined  efforts,  they  failed  utterly  to 
stem  Labor's  oncoming  tide. 


74 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Assisted,  but  not  much,  by  three  or 
four  small  weekly  propaganda  sheets, 
published  in  State  capital  cities,  the  La- 
bor Party  eventually  secured  a  majority 
in  two  or  three  of  the  State  Legislatures 
and  in  the  Commonwealth  Parliament. 
The  political  power  and  influence  of  the 
Australian  newspapers  were  dealt  a 
staggering  hlow,  from  which  they  have 
never  recovered  in  a  political  sense. 
This  was  unmistakably  demonstrated 
during  the  war  period.  (  )n  two  occa- 
sions during  that  period  the  Common- 
wealth Government  submitted  a  refer- 
endum of  the  electors  (adult  suffrage) 
the  question  of  whether  the  Australian 
army  fighting  ahroad  should  he  rein- 
forced by  means  of  military  conscrip- 
tion. The  Lahor  Party  opposed  mili- 
tary conscription  and  was  supported  by 
five  small  and  feehle  daily  newspapers 
which  it  had  meanwhile  established. 
The  whole  of  the  powerful  anti-Lahor 
and  non-Labor  newspapers,  numbering 
700  throughout  Australia,  strongly  ad- 
vocated the  principle  of  and  need  for 
military  conscription.  On  both  refer- 
endums  there  were  substantial  majori- 
ties against  conscription.  Clearly  the 
old-established  newspapers  had  lost  their 
power  to  sway  the  people  at  will. 
Though  doubtless  the  element  of  strong 
self-interest  and  family  interest  in  the 
conscription  question  was  beyond  the 
reach  of  newspaper  argument  in  the 
case  of  vast   numbers  of  the  electors. 

(  )ne  result  of  this  loss  of  influence  is 
that  the  political  side  of  Australian 
journalism  is  gradually  losing  much  of 
the  importance  it  once  possessed.  More 
and  more  attention  i^  being  paid  to  the 
world's  news,  received  by  cable,  and  to 
happenings  affecting  the  general  life  of 
the  community.  In  short,  the  Austral- 
ian newspaper  is  becoming  less  of  a 
political  machine,  and  therefore  truer 
to    name. 

In  addition  to  the  weekly  Labor 
papers    already    referred    to    the    Labor 


party  now  publishes  five  daily  journals, 
one  each  in  llobart  (Tasmania),  Ade- 
laide (South  Australia),  Brisbane 
(Queensland),  Ballarat  (Victoria)  and 
Broken  Mill  (New  South  Wales). 
There  is  no  Labor  daily  press  in 
either  of  the  two  chief  cities — Mel- 
bourne and  Sydney,  although  at  the 
outbreak  of  the  war  the  Labor  party 
had  a  modern  plant  ready  in  Sydney 
to  produce  a  daily  newspaper.  Owing 
greatly  to  the  narrow  lines  and  nar- 
row views  which  characterize  the  La- 
bor papers  as  compared  with  their  non- 
Labor  opponents — which,  again,  is 
owing  greatly  to  the  fact  that  the  lead- 
ers of  the  party  have  not  yet  learned 
the  first  essentials  of  newspaper  man- 
agement— little  journalistic  or  financial 
success  has  yet  been  achieved  by  any 
Labor  daily  paper.  All  of  them  are 
dependent  on  constant — and  grudging— 
financial  support  from  the  Labor 
unions.  The  circulations  too.  are  ex- 
ceedingly small,  even  among  the  work- 
ing class,  in  comparison  with  those  of 
non-Labor  papers.  One  explanation  of 
the  poor  circulations  is  that  the  Labor 
publications  are  not  newspapers  in  the 
proper  sense  of  that  term.  They  may 
be  described  generally  as  propaganda 
sheets  disguised  as  newspapers,  and 
they  are  therefore  neither  one  nor  the 
other.  They  try  to  be  both,  and  fail 
both  ways.  Another  drawback  to  suc- 
cessful Labor  journalism  is  that  there 
are  wide  divisions  within  the  party 
itself,  These  divisions  cover  sections 
such  as  the  revolutionary  communists. 
of  the  Karl  Marx  school;  guild  social- 
ists ;  State  socialists  and  constitutional 
democrats.  All  these  sections  issue 
small  weekly,  fortnightly,  or  monthly 
newspapers  which  have  little  or  no  in- 
fluence on  the  mass  of  the  proletariat. 
From  the  offices  of  most  of  the  prin- 
cipal daily  papers  bulky  general  weekly 
newspapers  are  issued.  There  is  usual- 
Iv    one    such     weekly    paper    connected 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


7? 


with  each  big  daily  paper  proprietary. 
These  publications  are  a  distinctive 
feature  of  Australian  journalism.  They 
are  not  mere  weekly  enlargements  of 
the  dailies,  but  they  are  entirely  sepa- 
rate publications  under  separate  titles. 
They  contain  summaries  of  the  week's 
news,  special  agricultural*,  pastoral,  hor- 
ticultural and  sporting'  articles,  short 
and  serial  stories,  and  an  illustrated 
section  printed  on  art  or  supercalen- 
dared  paper.  Many  of  these  are  high- 
class  productions  and  have  large  circu- 
lations, chiefly  in  the  rural  districts. 
Australia,  however,  is  deficient  in  first- 
rate  magazines  and  reviews,  the  reason 
being  that  its  population  is  too  small 
to  carry   them. 

Except  at  Sydney,  in  the  State  of 
New  South  Wales,  there  are  no  Sunday 
papers  in  Australia.  In  that  city,  how- 
ever, three  Sunday  papers  are  published 
regularly,  two  of  them  from  the  offices 
of  evening  newspapers  and  one  inde- 
pendently. All  are  built  more  or  less 
on  the  lines  of  American  Sunday 
papers.  In  several  of  the  States  the 
publication  of  regular  Sunday  papers 
is  expressly  forbidden  by  law.  In 
those  States  it  is  provided  that  estab- 
lished newspapers  may  publish  three 
Sunday  editions  during  any  one  year, 
but  then  only  if  the  matter  contained 
in  such  editions  is  of  national  impor- 
tance. 

Among  the  weekly  publications  there 
is  one  which  is  known  in  most  parts 
of  the  English-speaking  world.  '1  his 
is  "The  Bulletin."  published  in  Sydney, 
Xew  South  Wales.  It  is  the  nearest 
approach  that  Australia  has  to  a  na- 
tional paper.  In  its  make-up  and  range 
of  matter  there  is  nothing  quite  like 
it  in  the  whole  world  of  journalism. 
Founded  by  an  extraordinarily  brilliant 
Australian,  whose  outlook  was  essen- 
tially that  of  the  average  Australian,  it 
has     done     much     to     mould     national 


thought  and  character,  and  at  the  same 
time  it  is  an  admirable  mirror  of  that 
thought  and  character.  Seizing  the 
field  of  humor  and  satire  left  largely 
untouched  by  the  daily  newspapers,  the 
founder  of  "The  Bulletin"  produced  a 
paper  brimful  of  those  qualities.  After 
the  usual  struggle,  owing  to  insufficient 
capita],  it  was  a  complete  success.  It 
handles  politics,  finance,  art,  literature. 
and  the  topics  of  the  day  from  a  broad 
national  viewpoint,  and  all  its  articles, 
paragraphs,  cartoons,  caricatures  and 
drawing  are  given  a  witty  turn  typically 
Australian.  The  humor  is  so  adroitly 
mixed  with  sound  common  sense,  good 
taste,  solid  argument,  and  lofty  nation- 
al sentiment  that  "The  Bulletin"  makes 
delightful  reading.  It  is  as  popular 
with  women  readers  as  with  men.  Its 
contributors  are  to  be  found  in  all 
classes  of  the  community,  and  in  every 
remote  corner  of  the  island  continent. 
It  has  done  more  to  encourage  and 
build  up  the  short  story  writers  and 
the  black  and  white  artists  of  Australia 
than  any  one  paper  in  any  other  coun- 
try has  done  for  its  writers  and  artists. 
It  is  popular  in  city,  town  and  country. 
Indeed  it  has  been  said  that  if,  on  the 
long,  lonely  back  country  tracks  of 
Australia,  you  meet  a  solitary  swag- 
man,  bush  worker,  or  sheep  or  cattle 
droven.  he  may  ask  you  for  a  pipe  of 
tobacco,  but  he  is  sure  to  ask  for  a 
copy  of  "The  Bulletin."  And  withal  it 
is  in  the  hands  of  practically  every 
financier  and  statesman,  investor  and 
business  man  in  every  part  of  the  Con- 
tinent. 

As  is  natural  in  a  country  so  de- 
voutly devoted  to  all  forms  of  sport,  the 
sporting  papers  are  numerous.  These 
follow  closely  the  lines  of  the  British 
ami   American   sporting   publications. 

The  great  handicap  under  which  the 
Australian  newspapers  suffer  is  the  cost 
of  obtaining  the  world's  big  news.    The 


76 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


bulk  of  this  news  is  cabled  from  Lon- 
don. England,  and  in  comparison  with 
the  cable  charges  to  other  countries, 
the  rate  per  word  is  high.  Two  cable 
lines  touch  Australia — the  Eastern  Ex- 
tension and  the  Pacific  cables.  The 
news  is  transmitted  through  those  lines, 
but  the  heavy  cost  is  a  drain  on  the 
resources  of  the  newspapers.  The 
whole  of  the  Australian  press  is  de- 
pendent on  three  cable  news  organiza- 
tions. One  of  these  is  controlled  by 
the  morning  newspapers  of  Sydney  and 
Melbourne,  formed  into  an  association 
for  that  purpose.  This  Association 
uses  its  own  service,  and  also  sells  it 
to  the  other  morning  papers  in  the 
capital  cities,  and  to  one  or  two  eve- 
inn-  papers  in  the  capital  cities  and 
to  one  or  two  evening  papers  in  the 
capital  cities  as  well.  The  other  two 
cable  news  organizations  are  at  present 
working  together  under  an  agreement. 
They  consist  of  a  service  controlled  by 
one  evening  paper  in  Sydney  and  an- 
other in  Melbourne,  and  of  the  Reu- 
ters' Service.  These  services  are  sold 
to  other  newspapers  throughout  Aus- 
tralia on  a  contributory  basis  which 
gives  the  contributors  no  voice  in  the 
management. 

With  slight  variations  the  laws, 
libel  and  otherwise,  governing  news- 
papers in  Australia  are  the  same  in  all 
the  States  of  the  Commonwealth.  They 
are  based  on  the  British  laws  dealing 
with  newspapers.  So  far  as  the  law 
of  libel  is  concerned,  the  principle  is 
that  nothing  must  he  printed  that  is 
calculated  to  injure  or  damage  a  person 
in  the  eyes  of  his  fellow-citizens.  Under 
it  a  newspaper  has  no  greater  rights  or 
privileges  in  commenting  on  public  af- 
fairs, or  in  criticizing  public  men  or 
other  persons,  that  are  possessed  by 
the  ordinary  citizen.  The  courts  of 
justice  are  very  strict  on  this  point,  and 
the  libel  law  is  resorted   to  by  persons 


who  consider  themselves  aggrieved 
much  more  frequently  in  Australia  than 
is  the  case  in  America.  The  Australian 
citizen  is  much  more  sensitive  in  re- 
spect to  what  is  said  about  him  in  t he- 
press  than  is  his  American  cousin.  Idle 
following  instance,  from  my  own  ex- 
perience, will  illustrate  the  nervous  con- 
dition of  the  Australian  newspapers  as 
regards  the  printing  of  libels.  During 
the  Broken  Hill  strike  of  1919-20, 
when  the  whole  city  was  laid  idle  for 
18  months.  "The  Barrier  Miner"  dis- 
covered that  three  of  the  strike  leaders, 
while  drawing  strike  pay  coupons,  were 
secretly  receiving  seven  pounds  a  week 
for  alleged  services  in  procuring  the 
attendance  of  union  members  for  exam- 
ination by  a  medical  commission  spe- 
cially appointed  by  the  Government,  at 
the  union's  request,  to  enquire  into  the 
health  conditions  at  the  mines.  The 
leaders  were  suspected  of  opposing  the 
work  of  the  health  commission,  and  so 
they  were  secretly  paid  salaries  by  the 
commission  to  counteract  their  adverse 
intensions — a  scheme  which  proved  suc- 
cessful. "The  Barrier  Miner,"  having 
got  the  men  to  unsuspectingly  convict 
themselves  out  of  their  own  mouth,  tele 
graphed  the  facts,  as  specially  good 
copy,  to  all  its  correspondent  news 
papers,  and  to  all  the  other  leading 
newspapers  in  Australia.  But  although 
the  strike  was  a  matter  of  great  na- 
tional concern,  scarcely  any — if  any — 
dared  to  reproduce  the  exposure.  The 
guilty  men  had  published  a  threat  of 
libel  actions  against  any  newspapers 
that  should  reprint  the  facts,  and  that 
sufficed  to  terrify  the  Australian  press 
into  silence.  The  men  did  begin  suits 
against  "The  Barrier  Miner"  but  they 
did  not  proceed  to  court.  Meanwhile 
one  of  them  was  hounded  out  of  office 
over  the  matter,  and  the  others  went 
out  of  their  own  accord.  This  is  an 
example  of  the  paralyzing  effect  of  the 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE.                         77 

libel  nightmare  on  the  Australian  press.  For  the  last  ten  years  the  working 
One  law,  peculiar  to  Australia,  has  journalists  of  Australia  have  been  or- 
been  enacted  by  the  Commonwealth  ganized  in  a  trade  union,  registered 
Parliament.  This  is  contained  in  the  under  the  industrial  law  of  the  Corn- 
Electoral  Act,  a  law  relating  to  and  monwealth.  This  union  is  known  as 
governing  the  election  of  members  to  the  Australian  Journalists'  Association, 
the  Commonwealth  Parliament.  In  it  Any  person  the  major  portion  of  whose 
there  is  a  clause  providing  that  between  income  is  derived  from  Journalism,  not 
the  date  of  the  issue  of  a  writ  for  an  being  a  managing  editor  or  chief  of 
election,  and  the  date  of  the  return  of  staff,  is  eligible  for  membership,  Prac- 
the  writ  to  the  President  of  the  Senate  ticallv  every  working  journalist  is  a 
or  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Rep-  member  of  the  organization,  which  has 
resentatives  every  article  appearing  in  obtained  by  appeals  to  the  Arbitration 
any  paper  commenting  on  matter  re-  Court  created  under  the  Industrial  law. 
lating  to  the  election  must  be  signed  awards  fixing  the  minimum  wages,  and 
by  the  writer  thereof.  This  provision  the  hours  and  conditions  of  labor  for 
was  brought  forward  by  the  Labor  all  its  members.  These  awards  have 
party,  and  was  intended  as  a  blow  at  substantially  increased  the  wages  of 
the  influence  of  the  anti-Labor  news-  journalists  on  the  regular  newspaper 
papers.  It  was  considered  that  if  the  staffs  throughout  Australia,  and  at  the 
names  of  the  writers  of  political  articles  same  time  they  have  decreased  the 
were  attached  to  them,  it  would  de-  hours  of  labor.  Separate  agreements 
tract  from  the  weight  of  such  articles,  have  been  made  by  the  Journalists' 
The  underlying  idea  was  to  detach  the  Association  with  city  and  country 
force  and  influence  of  a  paper  from  the  newspaper  proprietors.  In  the  capital 
articles  published  in  it,  and  to  give  cities,  the  Melbourne  (Victoria)  and 
them  the  appearance  of  expressions  of  Sydney  (New  South  Wales)  wage  rates 
mere  personal  opinions  by  obscure  are  taken  as  a  basis,  and  percentage  re- 
writers,  ductions  are  provided  in  the  wages 
The  intention  of  the  law.  however,  paid  in  the  smaller  capitals  like  Bris- 
has  been  fairly  generally  defeated  bane  (Queensland),  and  Perth  (West 
whenever  desired.  This  has  been  done  Australia),  Hobart  (Tasmania),  and 
by  attaching  to  each  article  the  names  Adelaide  (South  Australia).  At  first, 
of  the  whole  of  the  persons  composing  where  the  journalists  were  fighting  for 
the  editorial  and  leader-writing  staff,  the  formation  of  the  Association  and 
by  appending  a  statement  that  the  for  their  awards  from  the  Arbitration 
article  was  written,  after  consultation,  Court,  there  was  some  friction  with 
by  "Brown  Smith,"  or  by  printing  a  the  newspaper  proprietors,  who  resented 
statement  in  some  part  of  the  news-  the  application  of  trade  union  princi- 
paper  to  the  effect  that  for  any  matter  pies  in  the  working  of  their  literary 
in  the  issue  requiring  a  signature  under  staffs.  Now,  however,  the  position  has 
the  law,  "Brown  Smith,  "Smith  Brown,"  been  accepted,  and  the  scheme  is  op- 
and  Jones  Robinson"  are  responsible,  erating  smoothly  and,  on  the  whole. 
Consequently  it  is  exceedingly  doubtful  satisfactorily. 

whether  the  law  has  had  the  effect  de-  The    need    for   a    national    Australian 

sired  by  its   framers.     It  has   been  the  daily    newspaper    is    crying    aloud    for 

means  of  satisfying  some  idle  curiosity  recognition.      The   great   dailies    of   the 

as  to  the  identity  of  the  political  writ-  large    cities    are    all    parochial.      Even 

ers,   but   that   is   about   all.  the  greatest  of  them — and  they  include 


7* 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


newspapers  that  would  bear  comparison 
with  the  world's  best — give  surprisingly 
little  space  to  Australian  affairs  out- 
side  the  State  in  which  they  are  pub- 
lished. Indeed,  after  eliminating"  the 
purely  metropolitan  news  and  the 
foreign  cables,  there  is  little  left.  Aus- 
tralian happenings  of  far  greater  im- 
portance than  much  of  the  news  cabled 
from  the  other  side  of  the  world  are 
often  overlooked  if  outside  the  boun- 
daries of  the  State  in  which  the  paper 
is  published.  One  would  think  that 
the  leading  metropolitan  dailies  had 
come  to  an  agreement  not  to  compete 
with  one  another,  otherwise,  within  20 
years  of  federation,  surely  one,  if  not 
more,  of  them  would  have  published  an 


edition  simultaneously  in  each  State. 
That  opportunity  will  not  be  left  un- 
seized forever ;  for  though  it  would 
take  large  capital  to  initiate  a  new  daily 
newspaper  on  national  lines,  with  a  na- 
tional policy,  and  published  simultan- 
eously in  each  of  the  six  states,  such  a 
paper  would  really  have  no  opposition 
in  its  own  wide  sphere.  Three-fifths  of 
the  population  would  be  reached  by 
such  a  paper  before  breakfast  every 
morning.  Well  and  patriotically  con- 
ducted, such  a  journal  would  indeed  be 
a  power  in  the  land,  and  a  power  for 
great  good.  Perhaps  such  a  paper  will 
soon  appear.  Until  it  does,  it  cannot 
be  said  that  the  Australian  press  has 
attained    its    majority. 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


79 


The  Need  in  Latin-American  Countries 


Virgilio   Rodriguez   Beteta 

Representing    the    Press   .  Issociation    of 

.South  .  Imeriea 


Being  one  of  the  fundamental  pur- 
poses of  the  Press  Congress  to  establish 
and  maintain  closer  relations  between 
the  publishers  of  newspapers  and  maga- 
zines in  every  country,  nothing  could  be 
better  than  the  formation  of  subdivisions 
of  this  Congress,  in  such  a  way  that  this 
may  be  the  big  organization  which  will 
preside  over  all  subdivisions  and  these 
will  serve  with  greater  concentration  on 
sectional  problems,  and  particular  atten- 
tion to  relations  between  peoples  of  one 
section  of  the  globe.  The  organization 
of  a  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference  to  be 
a  part  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World  is,  in  consequence,  not  only  a 
logical  step  in  the  development  of  the 
functions  of  the  Press  Congress  of  the 
World,  but  a  step  of  more  than  ordinary 
significance  at  this  time  when  the  eyes 
of  the  world  are  turned  expectantly  on 
the  development  of  this  section  of  the 
globe. 

The  papers  presented  on  the  occasion 
of  the  inauguration  of  this  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Congress  widely  show  how  prac- 
tical can  be  the  promotion  of  under- 
standing between  the  Pan-Pacific  coun- 
tries to  secure  better  means  of  communi- 
cation between  them  and  above  all,  to 
advance  the  cause  of  world  peace. 

I  will  refer  now  only  to  what  this 
section  of  the  Press  Congress  can  ac- 
complish in  the  case  of  Latin  America. 
All  of  the  Latin  American  Republics 
have  coastlines,  both  on  the  Atlantic  and 
the  Pacific,  with  the  exception  of  Uru- 
guay, Argentina,  Brazil,  Paraguay  and 
Bolivia,   but   even  these   countries   have 


considerable  interest  in  the  Pacific,  inso- 
far as  the  first  four  are  concerned  they 
are  interested  because  of  the  establish- 
ment of  railroad  facilities  between  Chile 
and  the  Republic  of  Argentina  by  means 
of  the  Transandean  Railway.  In  refer- 
ence to  the  last  named  of  these  republics, 
Bolivia,  which  has  no  coast,  either  on 
the  Atlantic  or  the  Pacific,  has  its  natur- 
al outlet,  however,  toward  the  Pacific. 
In  spite  of  the  many  commercial  inter- 
ests which  Latin  America  has  on  the 
Pacific  it  can  be  said  that  there  are  but 
very  few  relations  maintained  between 
these  countries  and  those  of  the  Ha- 
waiian Islands,  Japan,  China,  Korea, 
New  Zealand,  the  Philippines,  Australia 
and  other  countries  bordering  the  Pa- 
cific in  the  Old  World,  countries  which 
are  known  to  Latin  America  through 
name  only. 

There  are  in  Latin  American  countries 
bordering  the  Pacific  not  less  than 
seventy  wireless  stations,  among  them 
one  of  high  power  located  in  Chile,  but 
no  news  is  sent  there  directly  from  the 
Orient.  It  is  relayed  to  California  by 
wireless,  from  there  it  is  sent  to  New 
York,  thence  to  South  America  by  cable 
from  Galveston  on  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
going  to  Vera  Cruz,  Mexico,  crossing 
then  the  isthmus  and  going  from  there 
through  all  the  Pacific  countries  of  Cen- 
tral and  South  America. 

The  main  task  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Con- 
gress in  connection  with  the  interchange 
of  news  in  Central  and  South  American 
newspapers  should  be  directed  to  obtain- 
ing  direct   means   of   communication   at 


so 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


the  lowest  possible  rate.  The  dealings 
which  rapid  development  of  this  Con- 
gress is  maintaining  is  of  great  interest 
to  the  Orient  because  of  the  rapid 
growth  which  these  young  countries 
have  made  in  their  fight  for  advance- 
ment against  so  many  handicaps.  The 
Orient  would  be  interested  in  knowing- 
how  the  racial  problem  has  been  solved 
in  countries  like  Argentina  and  Ura- 
guay,  how  the  extension  of  a  great  popu- 
lation of  Negroes  in  Brazil  does  not 
constitute  the  problem  there,  and  how 
the  problem  of  a  large  native  Indian 
population,  by  means  of  its  slow  assimi- 
lation with  the  white  populations  is  be- 
ing solved.  You  of  the  Orient  will  be 
very  much  interested  in  knowing  of  the 
magnitude  and  intensity  of  the  fight  iti 
which  these  countries  have  been  engaged 
in  their  struggle  to  adopt  the  most  ad- 
vanced principles  of  representation  and 
democracy  in  spite  of  poor  preparation 
by  the  masses  and  a  national  indepen- 
dent life  when  these  countries  obtained 
their  independence  from  Spain.  Finally 
you  will  be  astonished  when  you  know 
the  progress,  the  figures  of  natural  trade 
and  some  other  striking  results  achieved 
by  some  of  these  countries.  While  a 
group  of  them  have  achieved  great  re- 
sults and  all  the  others  are  in  different 
degrees  of  development,  all  tending  to- 
ward the  same  results.  The  size  of  the 
Latin  American  territory  which  is  at 
least  four  times  that  of  the  United 
States  and  is  capable  for  a  population 
of  four  hundred  million  people,  and  the 
stupendous  number  and  variety  of  natur- 
al resources  foreshadows  that  Latin 
America  is  destined  to  occupy  a  great 
position  in  world  affairs.  And  now  it  is 
interesting  to  know  how  the  Orient  will 
be  benefited  from  the  position  which 
Latin   America  holds. 

From  the  beginning  of  the  develop- 
ment of  the  practical  works  of  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Congress  in  Latin  America  I  sug- 


gest the  necessity  of  starting  the  rela- 
tions with  it  by  means  of  a  center  of 
communication  established  at  a  point  in 
America  which  is  to  be  in  direct  con- 
tact, both  with  Latin  America  and  at  the 
same  time  with  the  Orient.  There  is 
but  one  way  to  begin,  that  is  to  say,  to 
take  advantage  of  an  intermediate  point. 
The  situation  is  similar  to  that  of  two 
persons,  who,  in  order  to  become  ac- 
quainted need  the  services  of  a  third 
person  to  make  the  introduction. 
Through  this  point  you  will  speak  to 
Latin  America  and  Latin  America  will 
speak  to  you,  it  being  the  center  of  dif- 
fusion and  the  source  of  the  information 
contained  in  your  newspapers,  maga-' 
zines  and  pamphlets,  and  vice  versa.  Of 
course  this  point  which  is  selected  must 
be  one  which  has  the  best  and  most 
rapid  means  of  communication  by  cable, 
wireless,  steamer  and  mail  with  both  the 
Orient  and  Latin  America.  Through 
this  center  there  would  be  developed  the 
mutual  relations  between  the  Orient  and 
Latin  America,  until  the  time  when  such 
communications  could  be  put  on  a  direct 
basis. 

That  is  the  way  for  the  Pan-Pacific 
Congress  to  promote  a  better  under- 
standing between  the  Pacific  countries 
of  Latin  America  and  the  Pacific  coun- 
tries of  the  Orient,  and  especially  of 
establishing  better  understanding  be- 
tween the  journalists  by  means  of  com- 
munication. In  so  far  as  the  high  pur- 
poses of  advancing  the  cause  of  the 
peace  of  the  Pacific,  a  phrase  of  deep 
significance  for  securing  the  peace  of  the 
world,  this  branch  of  the  Press  Congress 
should  make  the  task  of  Latin  America  a 
very  important  one.  There  are  in  the 
most  southwesterly  part  of  America  big 
problems  which  concern  the  international 
policies  of  all  Latin  America.  The  "War 
of  the  Pacific,"  so-called,  is  the  name 
given  by  history  to  the  war  between 
Chile   on    the   one  side,   and     Peru     and 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE.                         81 

Bolivia  on  the  other  side  during  the  last  dressed  is  Central  America.  The  separa- 
third  of  the  eighteenth  century.  This  tion  of  these  five  small  republics  which  at 
war  left  as  a  legacy  a  hitter  dispute  as  the  time  of  its  independence  and  some 
to  frontiers  and  provinces  which  has  been  twenty  years  after,  were  constituted  a 
impossible  to  settle  amicably  in  spite  of  sole  nation,  is  a  Latin  American  interna- 
the  many  efforts  used,  as  much  on  the  tional  problem  which  in  a  certain  way 
part  of  politicians  and  diplomatists  of  the  opposes  the  prestige  and  harmonious  de- 
contending  nations  as  by  the  mediation  velopment  of  the  American  continent  of 
of  disinterested  countries.  Neither  the  Spanish  speaking  countries.  Since  its  in- 
Pan-American  Congress,  started  nearly  dependence  the  most  intelligent  and  patri- 
thirty  years  ago  with  the  purpose  of  otic  public  men  have  been  engaged  in 
bringing  together  the  American  conn-  fighting  at  first  for  maintaining  the  unity 
tries,  both  of  Saxon  and  Spanish  origin,  of  the  Republic  of  Central  America  and 
for  the  settlement  of  international  quar-  afterwards  for  the  establishment  of  it. 
rels  and  disputes  and  adopting  a  common  Since  1885,  on  which  date  Rufino  Barrios 
point  of  view  in  regard  to  international  fell  in  battle,  fighting  gloriously  for  these 
policies,  or  the  efforts  of  prominent  men  ideals,  the  attempts  to  secure  this  union 
of  thought  and  good  will  in  North  and  by  means  of  force  were  stopped,  and  has 
South  America  have  succeeded  in  stop-  been  changed  by  means  of  a  policy  of 
ping  this  acute  quarrel  which  represents  diplomacy  and  '  other  peaceful  means, 
the  most  perplexing  problem  confronted  [n  1911  \  ]ea?ue  of  Central  American 
by  the  people  ot  Latin  America.  journalists  was  attempted  for  the  same 
Bolivia   expects,  naturally   enough,   an  ]mrpose       M   prescnt    t,        are   not   en_ 

outlet  to  the  sea,  of  which  she  was  de-  ,  •              •i-       ^,                               . 

.         .       .           .    ,                     .  gaged  in  re-uniting  the  governments,  but 

pnved  at  the  time  of  the  treatv  after  that  '     '.   .      ,              ,         t»-      i  • 

^          ,            ,       ,            '           ,  .  mamlv  the  peoples.     Big  things  are  bem«: 

war.      rem   demands  the   return   of  two  .   J       ,           ,        P  ,     ,    ,          , 

provinces   which     Chile     retains     in     her  reformed  worthy  of  the  help  and  support 

hands.      Chile    argues   that   she    has    the  of   a11    hono™ble    PeoPle-      The    Spanish 

right  for  doing  it  and  the  other  says  that  and  Latin  American  press  has  ottered  at 

the  main  condition  of  that  treatv.' which  different  opportunities    its    support,    and 

was  to  put  the  disputed  provinces  under  recently  most  of  the  papers  of  the  United 

the  test  of  a  plebiscite,  was  not  fulfilled.  States,  especially  the  papers  and  maga- 

The  settlement  of  the  problem  involved  zines  of  New  York,  have  become  inter- 
is  the  main  purpose  of  any  attempt  to  ested  in  this  affair  and  have  applauded 
maintain  peace  in  the  Latin  American  that  effort.  Should  the  Pan- Pacific  Con- 
Pacific.  If  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Con-  gress  take  upon  its  own  account  the  task 
ference  could  do  something  that  would  of  using  its  influence  for  securing  a 
gain  the  attention  of  the  most  influential  definite  moral  support  of  the  press  of  the 
journalists  of  both  countries  in  order  to  Pacific  it  would  be  very  opportune  and 
bring  about  a  common  point  of  view  it  would  signify  that  they  would  help  the 
which  would  result  in  arranging  a  cove-  five  countries  occupying  the  center  of  the 
nant.  it  would  be  an  achievement  which  Xew  World,  through  which  the  oceanic 
would  excel  any  other  one  accomplish-  communication  was  opened  and  which  is 
ment  made  by  the  many  tentative  Pan-  the  point  at  which  not  only  the  communi- 
American  Congresses  and  courts  of  arbi-  cation  of  the  Atlantic  with  the  Pacific 
tration.  was  consummated,  hut  which  represents 

Another  point  to  which  the  side  of  the  the  bridge  uniting  the  great  portions  of 

l'an-Pacific  Press  Congress  could  be  ad-  North  and  South  America. 


S2  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


A   Pan-Pacific   School   of   Journalism 


Dean   Waltee   Williams 
President    World's   Press    Congress 

I  do  not  intend  to  make  a  speech  on  of  the  improvement  of  the  rising"  gen- 
the  subject  assigned  to  me.  If  I  had  eration,  of  the  new  crop  of  journalists 
my  "druthers"  as  Mark  Twain  used  to  that  is  coming  on  in  the  various  conn- 
say.  1  would  "drnther"  be  honorary  sec-  tries  of  the  world.  These  earlier  jour- 
retary  than  to  hold  any  position  I  know,  nalists  have  made  a  great  mess  of  the 
\>  1  understand  the  duties  of  an  hon-  world  or  they  permitted  a  great  mess  to 
orary  secretary  they  are  to  look  wise  or  be  made  by  other  people  and  the  chaos 
pretty  and  be  silent  and  see  that  every-  that  confronts  us  today  is,  in  a  meas- 
one  else  stops  as  soon  as  possible  their  Lire,  in  a  very  considerable  measure, 
speeches.  Mr.  Cohen  fills  that  position  the  fault  of  the  press  of  the  world.  If 
beautifully,  as  did  Mr.  McClatchy  this  the  newspapers  had  been  fair  and  un- 
mooring. .  censored  and  courageous  in  their  deal- 
Director  Ford  has  asked  that  I  give  in8s  wilh  the  peoples  of  their  own  lands 
the  reasons  why  there  should  be  a  Pan-  aml  the  peoples  of  other  lands  we 
Pacific  School  of  Journalism.  I  will  would  not  so  certainly  have  had  the 
not  do  so.  My  conclusions  would  be  -rcat  war>  the  end  of  which  we  have 
correct  but  the  reasons  that  I  would  Just  happily  witnessed. 
give  might  be  altogether  wrong  and  Now  this  is  a  strategic  point  for  a 
while  you  might  agree  with  me  in  the  School  of  Journalism.  It  seems  to  me 
conclusions  you  might  disagree  with  the  there  are  not  to  be  very  many  schools 
reasons  that  I  suggested  as  the  means  of  journalism  in  the  world ;  there  is 
for  reaching  those  conclusions.  Travel  not  enough  room  for  them.  Many 
and  education  or  education  including  great  schools  of  journalism  there  can- 
travel  is  necessary  in  preparation  for  not  be  any  more  than  many  great  uni- 
any  form  of  journalism.  There  is  no  versities  there  cannot  be.  There  can 
occupation  in  life  except  that  of  an  be  abundant  primary  and  much  ele- 
idiot  that  can  lie  successfully  performed  mentary  and  secondary  education  but 
without  education  of  some  kind.  Most  higher  education  in  the  larger  sense  can 
of  us  are  in  journalism  by  accident  or  only  be  successfully  given  at  certain 
inheritance  or  inability  to  get  into  any-  great  centers  or  certain  places  where 
thing  else  or  for  some  other  incidental  opportunities  exist  therefor,  and  one 
reason,  and  that  is  one  trouble  with  of  these  places  it  seems  to  me,  as  far 
journalism  and  we  can't  improve  jour-  as  journalism  is  concerned,  is  this  pe- 
nalism  very  much  without  improving  culiar  community  in  which  we  find  our- 
j  our  nalists  and  I  have  very  little  hope  selves  this  afternoon,  and  the  reason  for 
of  the  improvement  of  journalists  who  that  of  course  is  that  map.  The  map 
have  reached  the  age  of  permissible  in-  makes  of  Honolulu  a  Charing  Cross  out 
discretion,  such  as  the  age  reached  by  on  the  Pacific ;  it  makes  it  a  terminal 
some  who  I  see  before  me  and  behind  station,  a  station  where  people  can  stop 
me  in  this  room,  but  I  have  great  hope  a  while  and  then  go  on  to  some  other 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


83 


place,  having  changed  cars  or  trams  or 
ships  or  outrigger  canoes  in  the  center 
of  this  great  ocean,  and  that  is  one 
reason.  Another  reason  is  that  here 
we  have  the  customs  and  habits  of 
peoples  of  the  Pacific  carried  out  in 
actual  everyday  life,  to  be  studied  here 
as  a  laboratory  before  our  eyes,  or  a 
panorama  to  perceive  as  we  look  out  on 
it  which  could  be  obtained  by  students 
nowhere  else  in   the   world. 

These  are  some  reasons  why  the  con- 
clusions seem  to  me  correct  that  an 
institution  here  which  would  take  for 
a  year  or  two  students  in  their  senior 
years  or  as  graduate  students  from 
Japan,  China,  New  Zealand,  Australia, 
the  Mainland  and  the  Philippines  and 
let  them,  for  a  year  or  two  here,  under 
proper  auspices,  with  inspiring  teach- 
ers, see  how  the  others  live.  In  a 
short  time  they  could  go  back  to  their 
own  countries  knowing  as  much  about 


conditions  of  life  among  other  peoples 
as  they  would  by  extensive  travel  and 
long  study  in  any  of  the  countries  thus 
represented. 

That  it  seems  to  me  has  its  value  for, 
after  all.  as  it  cannot  be  too  frequently 
said,  if  journalism  is  to  be  anything 
other  than  a  mere  occupation  to  fur- 
nish bread  and  butter  to  those  engaged 
in  it,  if  it  is  to  reach  its  highest  mis- 
sion, it  must  undertake  to  make  the 
world  better  because  it  has  been  in  the 
world.  In  its  highest  analysis  it  is  a 
profession  of  public  service.  Some  one 
said  the  other  day  that  a  good  definition 
of  journalism  is  a  profession  that  knew 
where  hell  is  about  to  break  out  and 
had  a  reporter  there  to  tell  what  hap- 
pened when  the  devil  appeared.  It 
seems  to  me  a  better  definition  for  the 
new  journalism  in  the  new  world  is 
that  it  is  a  profession  that  knows  where 
heaven  can  be  brought  about  and  has 
a  reporter  on  hand  to  lift  the  lid. 


S4 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE 


The   Pan-Pacific   Press   Congress 


Dr.  Frank  l\  IU.xkkr 
Executive  Secretary  Pan-Pacific  Union 


The  hour  has  come  to  close  this  ses- 
sion of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Confer- 
ence and  with  it  there  terminates  as 
well  the  official  program  of  the  Press 
Congress  of  the  World.  Very  soon,  all 
too  soon  to  suit  those  of  us  who  belong 
to  Hawaii,  yon  will  begin  retracing 
your  steps.  Very  soon  comfortable  and 
commodious  vessels  and  swift  trains 
will  have  carried  you  back  to  your 
desks  and  very  soon  you  will  find  your- 
selves in  your  accustomed  places,  en- 
gaged in  your  accustomed  duties,  meet- 
ing your  accustomed  associates  and 
again  living  your  accustomed  lives.  For 
a  brief  time  you  will  have  slipped  out 
i't"  your  place  in  the  smoothly  working 
machinery  with  which  each  of  you  has 
surrounded  himself  and  of  which  each 
is  an  integral  and  essential  part.  Soon 
you  will  have  slipped  back  into  your 
particular  niches,  outwardly  unchanged 
by   your  visit  to  Hawaii. 

While  your  avoirdupois  may  show 
some  increase,  nevertheless,  I  have  no 
doubt,  yonr  architectural  lines  will  still 
bear  sufficient  resemblance  to  your 
former  proportions  to  enable  your 
friends  to  recognize  your  silouette.  Out- 
wardly. 1  say,  all  will  be  as  before,  but 
inwardly,  I  doubt  not,  there  will  have 
come  a  change  as  a  result  of  new  pre- 
ceptions,  an  enlarged  outlook,  an  ener- 
gizing vision,  for  you  have  been  seeing 
with   the  mind  as   well  as  with  the  eye. 

The  citizens  of  Hawaii,  with  that  hos- 
pitality for  which  they  are  justly 
famous  (  I  ran  say  this  without  im- 
modesty for  I  have  been  here  not  much 
longer    than    yourselves)    have    tried    to 


make  it  easy  for  you  to  see  something 
(if  nature's  wonders  here  to  be  found  in 
lavish  profusion;  to  gain  some  notion 
at  first  hand  of  Hawaii's  important  oc- 
cupations ;  to  learn  somewhat  of  the 
customs,  lore  and  character  of  the  great 
race  of  Polynesians  who  have  long  in- 
habited these  Islands,  and  to  form  some- 
idea  of  the  problems  of  labor  and  race 
here   to   be    found. 

Although  we  hope  you  will  have 
found  these  features  of  sufficient  inter- 
est to  lead  you  to  speak  and  to  write 
of  them  as  opportunity  arises,  never- 
theless, if  that  inward  change  of  which 
I  speak  has  lead  you  to  do  no  more 
than  to  observe  and  enjoy  the  unpar- 
alleled beauties  of  sea  and  land  and 
sky,  here  to  be  found,  your  trip  will 
have  fallen  short  of  its  possibilities, 
both  to  you  and  to  us,  for  you  will 
have  missed  the  interrelations  of  things, 
the  hidden  meanings,  the  things  which 
do  not  appear.  In  such  event  it  will 
be  as  though  "having  eyes  one  sees 
not"  and  "having  ears  one  hears  not." 
A  Prophecy  of  the  Pacific 

That  the  countries  and  states  border- 
ing the  Pacific  and  in  the  Pacific  con- 
stitute a  region  having  features  and 
characteristics  and  problems  which  dif- 
ferentiate it  from  every  other  region 
has  been  recognized  by  many.  Seventy 
years  or  more  ago  W.  H.  Seward,  then 
Hnited  States  Senator  from  New  York, 
and  later  Secretary  of  State  under 
Lincoln,  in  a  notable  speech  in  the 
Senate  gave  expression  to  a  remarkable 
prophecy  concerning  this  region.  He 
said  : 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


85 


"Henceforth       European      commerce, 

European  politics,  European  thought, 
and  European  activity,  although  actual- 
ly gaining  force;  and  European  connec- 
tions, although  actually  becoming  more 
intimate,  will  nevertheless  relatively 
sink  in  importance;  while  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  its  shores,  its  islands  and  the 
vast  region  beyond,  will  become  the 
chief  theatre  of  events  in  the  world's 
great  hereafter." 

President    Harding's    Views 

The  fact  that  on  Armistice  Day,  No- 
vember 11th  next,  there  convenes  in 
Washington  at  the  call  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  representa- 
tives of  the  principal  allied  and  asso- 
ciated powers  to  consider  the  principles 
and  policies  which  shall  govern  in  and 
about  the  Pacific,  is  clear  proof  of  the 
fact  that  in  the  view  of  the  President 
of  the  United  States  the  future  peace 
of  the  world  now  turns  on  the  settle- 
ment of  diffculties  in  the  Pacific.  If 
further  proof  of  his  interest  in  the  Pa- 
cific were  needed  it  would  be  found  in 
the  letter  of  greetings  which  he  sent 
to  the  delegates  to  the  Pan-Pacific  Edu- 
cational Conference  which  convened  in 
this  city  in  August  last.  Let  me  read 
his  letter : 

"The  Pan-Pacific  Congress  on  Edu- 
cation soon  te  meet,  has  greatly  ap- 
pealed to  my  imagination,  and  1  want 
to  express  my  hopes  that  it  will  be 
marked  by  a  measure  of  success  that 
will  justify  all  the  hopes  that  have 
been  entertained  for  it.  It  seems  onh 
yesterday  that  we  thought  of  the  broad 
Pacific  as  separating  two  unrelated 
worlds,  now  we  have  come  to  regard 
it  as  a  world  by  itself,  the  greatest  of 
neighborhoods,  the  romantic  meeting 
place  of  East  and  West,  where  each 
merges  into  the  other  and  both  dis- 
cover that  at  last  the  supreme  interests 
of  humanity  are  common  to  all  men 
and    races.      Two-thirds   of    the    earth's 


population  live  in  the  lands  of  the  Pa- 
cific, numbering  the  oldest  and  the 
newest  of  organized  communities,  and, 
characteristic  of  our  times,  their  mighty 
ocean  is  conic  to  be  regarded  by  all  of 
them  as  a  bond  rather  than  a  barrier. 
In  a  large  way  we  must  feel  that  the 
future  of  the  race,  the  hope  of  creating 
a  true  community  of  men  and  nations 
and  civilizations,  each  retaining  its  own 
traditions,  character  and  independence, 
yet  all  serving  the  common  end  of 
human  progress  must  greatly  depend 
on  the  development  of  your  fine  ideal 
of  a  Pan- Pacific  neighborhood.  With 
better  acquaintance,  more  intimate  inter- 
dependence, riper  mutual  understand- 
ings, we  shall  advance  to  the  realiza- 
tion of  such  an  ideal.  I  feel  that  your 
Educational  Congress  is  one  of  the  most 
practical  means  of  drawing  these  com- 
munities thus  closer  together,  and  there- 
fore have  special  reasons  to  wish  it 
well." 

Statement  by  Lloyd  George 

In  this  connection  I  want  also  to 
bring  to  your  attention  a  statement 
made  by  Lloyd  George,  uttered  but  a 
few  weeks  ago,  in  discussion  of  the 
British-Japanese  alliance.  As  quoted 
by   the  Associated   Press,   he   said : 

"If  the  alliance  with  Japan  could  be 
merged  into  a  greater  understanding 
with  Japan  and  the  United  States  on 
all  problems  of  the  Pacific,  that  would 
be  a  great  event,  and  it  would  be  a 
guarantee  for  the  peace  of  the  world. 
The  problems  of  today  may  be  in  the 
Atlantic.  Yesterday  they  were  in  the 
German  ocean,  and  they  may  pass  to- 
morrow into  the  Pacific  and  when  they 
do  the  powers  that  are  most  greatly 
concerned  in  the  Pacific  are  America, 
Japan.  China  and  the  British  Lmpire. 
These  four  great  powers  are  primarily 
concerned  with  having  a  complete  un- 
derstanding with  regard  to  the  Pacific. 
The   surest    way    to   make   a   success   of 


86  FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

any  disarmament  plan  is,  first  of  all.  to  united  by  Mr.  Ford  has  been  much  the 
arrive  al  an  understanding  upon  the  same  as  that  which  communities  gen- 
Pacific."  erally  take  toward  projects  of  like  char- 
Ex-President  Roosevelt's  Comment  acter.  At  first  the  feeling  was  one  of 
And  may  I  not  add  also  the  words  indifference  and  of  incredulity.  Then 
of  the  late  President  Roosevelt,  speak-  came  a  period  characterized  by  an 
ing  to  this  matter  of  the  Pacific  as  a  awakening  interest  followed  by  the  full 
region  of  significance.  endorsement  and  the  active  support  of 
"The  Mediterranean  era  died  with  local  persons  of  the  highest  standing, 
the  discovery  of  America;  the  Atlantic  As  to  the  nations  and  countries  in 
era  has  reached  the  height  of  its  de-  and  about  the  Pacific,  Mr.  Ford  has 
velopment ;  the  Pacific  era,  destined  to  secured  for  the  Union  from  many  the 
be  the  greatest,  is  just  at  dawn."  endorsement  of  their  chief  administra- 
Attitude  of  Press  Congress  of  World  tive  officers  and  the  permission  to  use 
This  area  which  we  are  calling  the  their  names  as  sponsors.  Among  these 
Pacific  region,  is  so  big  and  broad,  countries  are  the  following:  The  United 
so  diversified  in  its  peoples,  its  climate,  States  and  Canada  in  North  America; 
it>  industries;  and  we  in  turn  may  be  New  Zealand,  Australia,  Java,  the 
come  so  occupied  with  the  minutiae  of  Philippines  and  Japan  among  the  Pa- 
mir particular  vocations  that  it  is  easy  cific  islands;  and  Siam  and  China  on 
to  fail  to  see  the  larger  whole  and  con-  the  continent  of  Asia. 
sequently  to  fail  to  do  our  part  in  furthermore,  such  is  the  recognition 
bringing  into  harmonious  relationship  accorded  the  Pan-Pacific  Union,  that  Mr. 
the  divergent  elements  to  be  found  Ford  succeeded,  through  the  assistance 
therein.  The  fact,  however,  that  the  of  the  Federal  Bureau  of  Education  and 
Press  Congress  of  the  World  thought  of  the  Pan-American  Union,  in  having 
it  important  enough  to  meet  here  in  the  Department  of  State  of  the  United 
Hawaii  and  that  you  have  thought  it  States  government,  through  its  diplo- 
wise  to  organize  a  Pan-Pacific  Press  matic  connections,  extend  to  the  gov- 
Conference  to  carry  forward  lines  of  ernments  and  self-governing  colonies  of 
work  which  have  to  do  primarily  with  the  Pacific,  a  formal  invitation  to  send 
this  region  show  unmistakably  that  you  delegates  to  the  Pan-Pacific  Educational 
■  ire  not  blind  to  the  need  or  to  the  pos-  Conference  held  last  August  here  in 
sibilities.  I  lonolulu. 

The   Pan-Pacific   Union  Pan-Pacific  Conferences 

Fourteen   years  ago   this   vision   of   a  A  year  ago  the  leading  scientists  of 

Pacific    region    knit    together    in    all    of  Pan- Pacific  regions  were  convened  here 

its  parts  and  its  interrelations  by  friend-  by  the    Pan-Pacific  Union   in  a  confer- 

ly  understanding  came  to  Mr.  Alexander  ence   of   great    success,    held    under   the 

Hume   Ford.     Tike  many   other  move-  chairmanship  of  Dr.   Herbert  E.  Greg- 

ments  which  have  grown  into  powerful  ory,  Director  of  Bernice   Puahi   Bishop 

agencies    for    public    welfare,    the    idea  Museum,    Honolulu.      Last    August,    as 

first    found   lodgment   in   the  mind   of   a  I     have     just     stated,     the     Pan-Pacific 

>ingle   individual  who   had   the   courage  Union  brought  together  seventy-five  ex- 

and  singleness  of  purpose  to  devote  his  perts   in   the  general   field   of   education 

entire  time  and  energy  to  its  promotion,  under   the   chairmanship    of    Dr.    David 

The    attitude    of    Hawaii,    itself,    to-  Starr   Jordan.      Copies   of   the   proceed- 

wards  the  Pan-Pacific  movement  inaug-  ings  have  just  come  from  the  press  and 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC   PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


87 


will     be    distributed    among    you.       In 

August  or  September  of  next  year  it 
will  bring  to  Honolulu  in  similar 
fashion  a  group  of  the  leaders  of  com- 
merce and  of  business  drawn  from  Pa- 
cific regions.  Other  conferences  of  like 
character  are  in  prospect  for  succeed- 
ing years,  all  of  which  are  in  line  with 
the  thought  with  which  I  am  sure  you 
will  agree,  that  amity  "and  goodfellow- 
ship  among  the  races  and  nations  of 
this  great  region  will  be  conserved  and 
stimulated  by  bringing  together  leaders 
in  the  different  fields  of  human  activity. 
All  of  this  has,  let  me  add,  been  ac- 
complished in  fourteen  years  by  the 
genius  of  one  man  and  with  the  co- 
operation and  help  of  a  board  of  trus- 
tees of  very  able  and  public-spirited 
persons  who  have  had  faith  in  Mr. 
Ford  and  in  the  practicability  and  value 
of  his  idea. 

A  Permanent  Regional  Press  Conference 

The  educational  conference  recently 
held  here,  with  unanimity  and  much 
enthusiasm,  recommended  that  the  Tan- 
Pacific  Union  take  up  and  carry  for- 
ward important  investigations  which  it 
proposed  and  lines  of  activity  which  it 
believes  will  minister  to  a  better  under- 
standing among  the  Pacific  nations. 
The  Pan-Pacific  Union  gladly  acceded 
to  its  request,  and  is  expanding  its  ma- 
chinery to  serve  as  indicated. 

This  morning,  as  the  heritage  of  the 
Press  Congress  of  the  World,  yon  have 


organized  a  permanent  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Conference  to  undertake  to  bring 
the  peoples  of  the  Pacific  into  closer 
and  better  relationships  through  making 
the  way  for  the  transmission  and  inter- 
change of  information  easier.  While 
maintaining  its  contact  with  the  Press 
Congress  of  the  World  you  have  ar- 
ranged to  place  it  under  the  fostering 
care  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union.  We 
gladly  accept  this  foster  child  under 
the  conditions  which  have  been  pro- 
posed and  will  give  its  nurture  and 
growth  our  sympathetic  and  active 
assistance  and  we  hope  that  two  or 
three  years  hence  when  the  second  meet- 
ing of  the  representatives  of  the  press 
of  the  Pacific  is  held  that  our  child 
will  be  a  lusty  and  vigorous  one  with 
lungs  and  a  voice  sufficiently  developed 
to  be  heard  by  the  governments  of 
the  nations  of  the  Pacific  whose  ears 
are  sometimes  a  bit  deaf. 

Thus  does  the  Pan-Pacific  Union 
seek  to  cooperate  with  any  and  all 
agencies  which  attempt  to  make  of  the 
region  of  the  Pacific  one  wherein 
the  minds  of  all  of  our  people  shall  be 
thoroughly  saturated  with  the  spirit 
which  prompted  Abram  of  old  to  say 
to  his  nephew  Lot  when  trouble  was  in 
prospect : 

"Let  there  be  no  strife,  I  pray  thee, 
between  me  and  thee,  and  between  my 
herdmen    and    thy    herdmen,    for   we    be 

brethren." 


ss 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Getting  News  In  and  Out  of  China 


EC.  P.  Wang 
Associate  Editor,  the  Shun  Poo,  Shanghai,  China. 


China  is  a  country  where  the  news- 
paper has  not  been  fully  developed  as 
yet.  Both  the  news  releasers  and  the 
news  readers  have  not  fully  understood 
the  value  of  good  news  service,  and 
hence  the  task  of  the  news  gatherers  is 
a  rather  difficult  one.  However,  as  the 
news  field  in  China  is  so  rich  and  abun- 
dant, and  practically  the  whole  of  which 
is  unexplored  yet,  a  conscientious  and 
adventurous  journalist  will  find  his  work 
in  China  to  be  one  of  unsurpassed  fasci- 
nation and  of  unexhaustible  inspiration. 
It  was  only  a  few  years  ago  that  people 
of  the  country  took  journalism  not  as 
a  profession  or  a  profession  of  public 
service.  But  today,  there  is  already  a 
group  of  people,  who  have  recognized 
the  importance  of  journalistic  work  in 
China  and  have  resolved  to  devote  their 
life  time  to  serve  the  public  through  their 
pens;  and  quite  a  number  of  them  can 
be  considered  as  real,  genuine,  and  faith- 
ful journalists,  journalists  who  chose 
journalism  as  their  profession  because 
they  have  faith  and  love  in  the  value,  in- 
terest and  fascination  of  the  work  itself, 
and  not  because  they  take  it  as  a  means 
to  achieve  a  certain  selfish  aim  for  them- 
selves or  for  somebody  else. 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  we  have  quite 

a  number  of  real  journalists  in  China, 
yet  the  news  service  in  the  country  to- 
day as  a  whole  has  not  been  proved 
satisfactory  or  efficient  as  it  should  be, 
either  because  the  news  releasers  would 
not  give  enough  cooperation  and  assist 
ance  in  putting  out  news  in  a  manner 
that  is  most  prompt  and  most  readily, 
or  because  the  news  gathered  and  pub- 


lished does  not  suit  the  taste  of  the  read- 
ing public.  In  China,  public  organiza- 
tions, or  even  government  bureaus,  have 
not  adopted  the  policy  and  have  not 
realized  the  advantage  of  releasing  news 
to  the  papers  from  time  to  time ;  and 
whatever  they  release  for  publication,  if 
any,  is  either  too  formal  and  uninterest- 
ing, or  too  brief  and  incomprehensible, 
and  in  majority  of  the  cases,  the  news 
gatherers  for  the  papers  have  to  go 
here  and  there  to  get  materials  to  supple- 
ment that  released  so  that  it  can  be 
rendered  into  readable  and  understand- 
able matter.  Many  a  time,  news  items 
of  public  interest,  the  nature  of  which  is 
common  and  the  significance  of  which  is 
not  far-reaching,  have  to  be  withheld 
from  publication  by  the  authorities  con- 
cerned, simply  because  they  deal  with 
the  government  or  government  officials, 
and  as  such,  they  should  be  regarded  as 
secret  to  the  public.  It  is  also  very 
common  that  meetings  and  gatherings  of 
public  organizations,  or  important  move- 
ments conducted  by  public  bodies,  which 
by  their  nature  possess  tremendous  news 
value,  would  pass  through  without  being 
noticed  and  reported  by  the  papers.  As 
a  rule,  people  irt  China  do  not  notify  the 
papers  as  to  what  they  have  done,  they 
are  doing,  or  they  will  do,  and  it  is  up 
to  the  papers  to  find  out  these  doings 
themselves.  The  institution  of  getting 
an  interview  for  publication  from  a  cer- 
tain person  is  practically  unknown  to 
Chinese,  not  because  the  reporters  are 
not  on  the  job,  but  because  the  people 
with  whom  the  reporters  interviewed  do 
not   want  publicity  in  that  way.     People 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


89 


in  China  still  hold  the  old  virtue  of 
modesty,  and  they  do  not  wish  to  have 
their  names  appear  in  the  papers  it"  they 
can  help  it,  even  if  the  appearance  of 
their  names  would  do  them  good  and 
would  give  them  fame  and  credit.  (  Un- 
people at  home  simply  have  not  heen 
accustomed  to  that  institution  as  vet. 

Then  again,  the  nature  of  the  news 
and  the  style  in  which  the  news  is  writ- 
ten have  a  great  deal  to  do  with  the 
success  and  popularity  of  the  papers. 
The  stud)-  of  newspaper  readers'  psy- 
chology in  China  is  a  very  interesting 
one.  The  majority  of  newspaper  sub- 
scribers  there  do  not  subscribe  for  the 
papers  for  the  news  of  the  day.  but  for 
the  so-called  literary  pages.  The  most 
important  feature  for  a  newspaper  to 
have  in  China  has  been,  and  will  con- 
tinue to  be  for  the  next  few  vears  to 
come,  these  literary  pages,  pages  contain- 
ing not  the  news  of  the  present  moment, 
but  the  news  happenings  of  years  ago, 
pages  not  containing  articles  on  current 
topics,  but  articles  of  literary  value. 
Anecdotes  concerning  certain  noted  per- 
sons in  the  past  are  always  more  pre- 
ferred than  telegraphic  news  telling 
stories  about  the  present  day  people  who 
reside  far  away,  or  describing  current 
events  which  happened  in  farther-off  dis- 
tricts or  countries.  A  few  stanzas  of 
poetry  are  much  more  welcomed  by  the 
readers  than  a  few  articles  on  political 
or  economic  problems.  Therefore,  the 
main  task  of  the  news  gatherers  of  the 
majority  of  the  papers  in  China  today, 
particularly  of  the  papers  in  the  interior 
parts  of  the  country,  is  to  gather  news 
not  of  the  present,  but  of  the  past,  be- 
cause that  is  the  only  way  to  keep  the 
paper  going,  and  that  is  also  the  only 
way  to  satisfy  the  subscribers.  Then  the 
style  of  writing  must  be  strictly  literary, 
and  no  vulgar  expressions  can  be  toler- 
ated, as  the  Chinese  are  essentially  a 
literary   people,   though    the  number   of 


educated  people  is  so  limited.  The  lit- 
erary style  must  be  kept  and  emphasized 
throughout  the  whole  paper,  including 
the  in\\s  columns.  Chinese  people  will 
not  read  a  story  which  consists  of  facts 
alone,  with  no  opinions  or  comments  in- 
termingled. The  more  opinion  the  writer 
puts  into  the  story,  the  more  the  story 
will  be  read;  and  papers  giving  the 
stories  in  pure  narrative  style  will  not 
appeal  to  readers  and  hence  will  not 
make  any  success  in  China.  The  Ameri- 
can journalistic  principle  of  giving  facts 
alone  and  no  comments  in  the  news  col- 
umns can  not  be  worked  out  in  China 
just  now,  and  most  likely  will  remain  un- 
workable for  a  few  decades  to  come.  The 
British  way  of  treating  news,  that  is : 
editorial  opinions  intermixed  with  news 
stories,  is  a  favorite  type  for  the  Chinese. 
However,  the  above  picture  only  gives 
a  description  of  conditions  existing  in  the 
newspaper  world  of  China  at  large,  and 
principle  papers  having  their  publica- 
tions issued  in  newspaper  centres  like 
Shanghai,  Peking,  Canton,  Hankow,  and 
Tientsin  are  being  conducted  more  or 
less  according  to  modern  methods  and 
principles.  Let  us  discuss  a  few  min- 
utes the  ways  through  which  these 
papers  are  getting  stories  for  their  news 
columns.  The  papers  in  these  newspaper 
centres,  though  still  publishing  literary 
pages  and  employing  literary  style  for 
their  writings,  are  paving  more  and  more 
attention  to  the  importance  and  value 
of  getting  news  of  the  day.  and  by  so 
doing,  they  are  gradually  introducing 
into  China  principles  of  modern  journal- 
ism. Now.  how  do  they  get  news?  That 
is  a  question  worth  considering.  Take 
the  Shanghai  papers  into  consideration 
first,  as  the  Shanghai  papers  are  by  far 
the  most  advanced  and  progressive  of 
all  the  papers  in  the  country.  Nearly  all 
the  papers  in  Shanghai  employ  special 
correspondents  stationed  in  the  different 
principal  cities,  who  send  in  the  bulk  of 


10  FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 

news  to  the  editorial  offices  of  their  missioners,  shipping  and  customs  offi- 
home  papers  generally  through  postal  cials.  guilds  and  chamber  of  commerce 
administration.  A  few  rich  papers  and  of  the  city  and  also  of  other  parts  of  the 
papers  of  old  standing  provide  a  better  country,  so  that  their  source  of  financial 
facility  for  the  public,  however;  the  cor-  news  will  never  become  exhausted.  Be- 
respondents  of  these  papers  would  send  sides  these  financial  editors,  there  are 
in  the  comparatively  more  important  special  reporters  who  are  always  ready 
news  through  telegraphic  channels.  As  to  be  on  the  job  for  any  reporting  work 
a  rule,  the  papers  possessing  facilities  of  at  any  time.  Social  news  and  news  of 
telegraphic  news  are  more  popular  to  the  human  interest  are  abundant  in  Shang- 
readers  than  papers  without  such  service,  hai,  and  taken  as  a  whole,  Shanghai 
and  the  telegraphic  news  items  them-  papers  generally  put  out  good  and  inter- 
selves  have  also  been  proved  more  pop-  esting  news  every  day.  A  few  of  these 
ular  than  items  sent  through  other  means,  papers  are  also  conducting  engraving 
The  most  highly  paid  correspondents  are  an(j  photographic  departments,  and 
those  who  are  stationed  in  Peking,  and  hence  they  have  the  advantage  over  other 
most  of  them  deserve  the  highest  merit,  papers  by  issuing  illustrated  pages.  In 
Peking  is  the  greatest  news  centre  in  Shanghai,  we  have  a  special  class  of 
China,  and  as  such,  the  responsibilities  newspaper  workers  known  as  profes- 
of  the  correspondents  towards  the  papers  sional  reporters.  These  professional  re- 
of  which  they  are  representatives  are  also  porters  are  not  employees  of  any  paper, 
the  greatest.  In  Peking,  where  the  seat  nor  are  they  employed  by  any  news 
of  China's  national  capital  is  situated,  agency  or  news  syndicate.  They  are  a 
news  items  of  all  description  and  of  all  class  by  themselves.  During  the  day 
nature  are  produced  nearly  every  minute,  they  would  go  out  and  get  whatever 
and  it  takes  men  of  big  calibre,  clear  news  t]iey  can,  and  towards  the  evening 
mind,  keen  judgment,  and  learned  far-  ()]-  ].lte  ni  t]ie  afternoon,  they  would  meet 
sightedness  to  sort  out  all  the  news  that  together  at  certain  appointed  tea  houses 
comes  to  him,  to  pick  the  true  and  good,  or  restaurants  to  talk  over  what  each 
and  to  send  it  back  to  their  home  nas  gathered  in  the  day.  They  would 
papers.  Correspondents  stationed  at  exchange  the  news  thus  gathered,  one 
other  cities  do  not  play  such  an  impor-  NVjth  another,  and  each  would  tise  his 
tant  part  as  those  at  Peking,  but  they  Dest:  style  to  render  the  materials  thus 
also  make  valuable  contributions  to  the  exchanged  into  story  form,  and  when 
papers  from  time  to  time.  these  stories  are  sent  to  the  papers  and 
For  local  news,  practically  all  Shang-  published  the  next  day,  they  get  their 
hai  papers  have  good  services,  both  by  pay  due  to  them  from  the  papers  in 
their  own  staff  and  by  professional  re-  which  their  stories  appear  according  to 


porters.      As  Shanghai  is  the  commercial  proper  basis  of  valuation. 
centre   of   China.    Shanghai    papers   give  Next    to    Shanghai,    we    have    another 

more  commercial  news  of  China  than  all  city    of    great    journalistic    importance, 

the   papers     in    the    country     combined,  namely  Peking.      Peking  is  an  important 

Most  of  the  papers  have  specials  dealing  city,  not   because    of    its    abundance  of 

with   economic     news,     and    very     often  news,   but    because   of  its  peculiarity   of 

learned  scholars  are  employed  as  finan-  being   a   city   of   news   agencies    instead 

vial  editors.     These  financial  editors  are  of   newspapers.     There  are  upwards   of 

in  close  and  constant    touch     with    the  thirty  news  agencies  in  Peking,  publish- 

leading  merchants,  bankers,  trade  com-  ing   news   in   Chinese,   English,    French, 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC  PRESS    CONFERENCE.                         91 

Russian    and   Japanese   languages,   con-  foreigners,  they  are  operated  with  cer- 

ducted  by  peoples  and  organs  of  differ-  tain  definite  purposes  to  achieve  certain 

ent     nationalities,     including      Chinese,  definite  objects.     Most  of  them  are  of- 

American,  British,  French,  Russian  and  ficial  organs  of  foreign  governments,  and 

Japanese.  It  is  these  news  agencies  in-  some  of  them  are  mouthpieces  of  big 
stead  of  newspapers,  which  are  carrying  foreign  financial  interests.  Since  the 
on  the  important  function  and  duty  of  policy  and  .purpose  of  these  agencies  are 
getting  the  news.  In  fact  many  of  the  so  diverged  one  from  another,  it  is  not 
newspapers  in  Peking  do  not  have  any  uncommon  that  the  news  items  issued  by 
reporters  of  their  own  to  run  after  news,  them  are  contradictory.  Very  often,  a 
and  whatever  they  published  in  the  British  report  about  conditions  in  Rus- 
morning  is  just  reprinted  from  what-  sia  appearing  in  today's  paper  has  to  be 
ever  they  have  been  supplied  by  the  corrected  by  a  Russian  version  tomor- 
news  agencies  the  preceding  evening,  row.  Still  very  often  news  sent  out  by 
Even  some  of  the  correspondents  of  Japanese  agencies  on  U.  S.-Japanese  re- 
Shanghai  papers  at  Peking  have  to  de-  lations  can  never  be  confirmed  by  Ameri- 
pend  upon  these  agencies  for  news,  can  agencies.  With  the  Chinese  agencies 
which  can  be  secured  by  regular  sub-  they  even  present  more  interesting  phe- 
scriptions.  These  reports  are  generally  nomena  than  the  foreign  agencies.  One 
issued  at  7  or  8  o'clock  in  the  evening  agency  would  send  out,  sometimes  purely 
and  soon  after  are  distributed  to  various  through  manufacturing,  a  report  about 
newspapers,  all  edited  and  ready  for  the  unfavorable  situation  of  the  political 
print  for  next  morning's  paper.  The  party,  with  whose  views  and  policies  the 
subscription  list  is  open  to  all  persons  issuing  agency  can  not  agree;  another 
who  desire  to  get  news  one  night  earlier,  agency  would  publish  something  con- 
and  as  a  rule,  the  subscription  list  of  cerning  entirely  private  affairs  of  an  in- 
private  persons  of  some  of  the  agencies  fluential  person  in  the  enemies  camp ;  and 
is  very  long.  By  this  way,  the  news  still  another  agency  would  put  out  in 
agencies  in  Peking  are  taking  the  place  its  reports  items  absolutely  untrue  and 
of  evening  papers,  and  many  of  them  detrimental  to  the  interests  of  the  op- 
have  built  up  a  reputable  standing  and  position  group.  Of  course,  all  these 
hence  become  very  influential.  It  is  al-  practices  do  not  appear  every  day,  but 
most  invariably  true  that  these  news  the  agencies  certainly  take  them  as  their 
agencies  are  either  run  by  political  par-  weapons  to  defeat  people  belonging  to 
ties  or  subsidized  by  certain  political  different  political  belief  and  faith. 
figures,  and  it  is  therefore  also  invari-  All  these  news  agencies  employ  a  cer- 
ably  true  that  the  news  they  issue  is  tain  number  of  news  gatherers  to  get 
tinged  with  political  color  or  mixed  material  for  publication.  As  it  has  been 
with  personal  element.  Such  being  the  said  above,  it  is  very  seldom  that  the  re- 
case,  it  is  therefore  rather  hard  for  news-  porters  can  get  news  through  regular 
paper  editors,  if  they  want  to  use  the  way  of  release,  the  news  agency  report- 
service  of  these  agencies,  to  distinguish  ers  in  Peking  have  to  resort  to  some 
between  a  real  story  and  a  yellow  infor-  other  ways  than  regular.  Generally  these 
mation.  to  trace  dividing  lines  of  politi-  reporters  are  alert  and  always  on  the 
cal  and  personal  interests,  and  to  select  job,  and  the  way  they  get  their  news  is 
the  right  ones  for  publication.  In  case  through  making  friends  with  govern- 
of  foreign  news  agencies,  that  is,  news  ment  employees,  visiting  parks,  tea 
agencies   supported    and    conducted    by  houses,    theatres,   and    restaurants,   and 


92 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


frequenting  other  amusement  places 
where  the  government  employees  go  dur- 
ing their  leisure  hours.  Through  con- 
versations with  others  and  through  hear- 
ing others'  conversations,  these  report- 
ers usually  get  good  stories  about  what 
is  going  on  in  and  around  Peking,  so- 
cially as  well  as  politically;  and  whoever 
secures  the  greatest  number  of  friends 
and  whoever  secures  the  greatest  number 
of  stories,  he  will  be  the  most  successful 
reporter  in  the  long  run.  Such  is  the 
fascinating  life  of  news  agency  reporters 
in  Peking,  and  such  a  fascinating  life  is 
probably  unequaled  anywhere  else  in 
the     world. 

With  regard  to  the  foreign  journalists 
in  China,  be  they  news  agency  reporters 
or  be  they  specially  sent  correspondents 
of  some  big  and  influential  papers  of  for- 
eign countries,  the  number  of  the  latter 
case  is.  by  the  way,  very  limited,  their 
life  is  an  entirely  different  one.  Their 
usual  way  of  getting  news  is  through  di- 
rect calls  on  the  people  from  whom  they 
want  to  get  something  and  through  cor- 
respondence with  people  from  whom 
they  are  anxious  to  learn  something.  It 
is  very  strange  to  say  that  Chinese  of- 
ficials and  authorities  are  very  willing  to 
grant  interviews  to  foreign  newspaper- 
men, and  to  answer  the  questions  put  to 
them  by  the  foreign  correspondents, 
though  such  interviews  are  as  a  rule  very 
formal  and  uninteresting,  and  though 
such  answers  given  are  generally  too  in- 
direct and  not  to  the  point.  To  an  expert 
foreign  correspondent,  who  has  been  in 
I  1) ina  for  many  years,  such  interviews 
and  answers  would  not  be  regarded  as 
good  and  fit  for  print,  until  he  puts  a  lot 
of  finishing  touches  to  them  by  his 
knowledge  of  Chinese  people  and  Chi- 
nese affairs;  but  an  inexperienced  one. 
who  just  came  over,  is  liable  to  use  them 
as  they  have  been  given  to  him,  possibly 
coupled  with  wrong  interpretations  of  his 
own.      It   is  through   this  latter  case  that 


many  a  time  misunderstanding  about 
China  and  Chinese  affairs  would  arise, 
and  it  is  therefore  sincerely  hoped  that 
no  foreign  newspaper  would  send  any 
correspondent  over  to  China,  unless  it  is 
assured  that  he  is  fully  equipped  with  a 
knowledge  about  China  and  thus  fully 
qualified. 

Now  just  a  word  or  two  about  sending 
Chinese  news  abroad  and  getting  for- 
eign news  into  China.  Both  of  these 
services  are  at  present  in  the  hands  of 
foreigners.  News  about  China  is  being 
dispatched  to  foreign  lands  by  tele- 
graphic lines,  submarine  cables,  or  wire- 
less transmission.  Most  of  the  materials 
are  taken  from  the  interviews  and  corre- 
spondence acquired  through  the  manner 
as  above  described,  and  the  rest  of  them 
are  secured  through  translations  from 
Chinese  papers.  They  are  usually  mis- 
leading and  full  of  misinterpretations. 
<  >n  the  other  hand,  news  about  foreign 
countries  generally  comes  through  the 
offices  of  foreign  news  agencies.  Only 
a  few  Chinese  papers  have  their  own 
correspondents  abroad,  though  many  of 
the  students  studying  in  foreign  coun- 
tries, including  girls,  have  been  con- 
tracted with  to  dispatch  news  home  by 
some  of  the  papers. 

Practically  a  hundred  per  cent  of  the 
Chinese  papers  take  in  foreign  news 
items  and  publish  them  as  they  are  sup- 
plied by  the  responsible  foreign  news 
agencies.  Sometimes  home  correspon- 
dence appearing  in  foreign  newspapers 
in  China  is  also  translated  by  the 
vernacular  papers  for  publication.  In 
both  cases,  the  news  thus  published  is 
not  of  the  first  hand  value,  and  generally 
not  the  kind  of  news  tit  for  Chinese 
readers.  It  is  therefore  strongly  urged 
that  neither  newspapers  of  foreign  coun- 
tries nor  Chinese  newspapers  at  home 
should  feel  satisfied  with  the  foreign 
news  service  which  they  are  getting  and 
both    of    them    should    send    out    corre- 


FIRST   PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


93 


spondents  of  their  own  to  get  whatever 
news  they  want,  which  can  be  taken  by 
the  readers  as  trustworthy  and  reliable. 
Such  is  a  brief  survey  of  news  service 
in  China,  and  the  conditions  as  now  pre- 
vailing arc  certainly  unsatisfactory  and 
inefficient.  We  want  improvement  and 
progress,  and  we  want  to  better  these 
conditions.  We  are  only  hoping  now 
that  the  cable  rate,  which  the  Press  Con- 
gress of  the  World  has  been  energetically 
discussing,  will  be  eventually  reduced, 
so  that  newspapers  of  China  and  of  for- 
eign countries  can  afford  to  send  corre- 
spondents to  do  some  real  correspon- 
dence work  between  China  and  other 
countries,  which  is  so  badly  needed,  and 
we  are  also  hoping  now  that  an  inter- 
national news  agency,  properly  managed 
and  conducted  with  honest  and  straight 
purposes,   which    the    Pan-Pacific    Press 


Congress  is  trying  to  realize,  will  be 
realized  in  the  near  future,  so  that  coun- 
tries, at  least  countries  bordering  on  the 
Pacific  Ocean,  can  be  better  acquainted 
one  with  another,  and  the  news  service 
between  them  can  be  better  handled. 
These  are  what  modern  journalists  in 
China  are  looking  for  from  the  Press 
Congress  of  the  World,  and  particularly 
from  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Congress. 
We  have  only  a  handful  of  journalists 
in  China  who  deserve  to  be  called  as 
journalists,  and  unless  the  journalists  of 
the  world,  particularly  Pan-Pacific  jour- 
nalists, will  be  willing  to  help  and  as- 
sist us,  we  can  not  expect  to  remedy  the 
present  journalistic  condition  in  China, 
which  is  so  undeveloped  and  behind  time. 
in  a  short  time.  Will  the  journalists  of 
the  world,  and  of  the  Pan-Pacific  coun- 
tries help  and  assist  us  ? 


"4 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


Closing  Words  to  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 


By  Alexander  Hume  Pord 
Pi  rector    Pan-Pacific    Union 


The  Pan-Pacific  Union  stands  for 
service.  Honolulu  is  the  service  station 
of  the  Pacific.  Here  I  have  met  at  one 
time  at  the  Conference  table  the  pre- 
miers of  three  Pacific  countries  and  this 
not  by  meditation,  but  by  the  accident 
of  the  arrival  of  their  steamers  the 
same  day  from  three  different  Pacific 
countries.  This  would  not  be  likely  to 
happen  anywhere  else,  and  it  is  because 
of  such  frequent  happenings,  bringing 
together  in  Honolulu  the  leading  men 
of  thought  and  action  from  different 
Pacific  countries,  that  this  city  was 
selected  a  dozen  years  ago  at  the  First 
Pan-Pacific  Convention,  as  the  meeting 
place  for  future  Pan-Pacific  Confer- 
ences. 

The  Pan-Pacific  Union  is  calling  a 
series  of  Conferences  of  the  leading- 
men  in  all  lines  of  thought  and  action 
in  the  Pacific.  It  realizes  that  without 
the  cooperation  and  thought  of  the 
press  it  is  powerless  to  go  forward. 
The  press  of  the  Pacific  is  today  the 
greatest  educational  force  and  the  great- 
est force  for  moral  uplift  in  the  whole 
world. 

In  some  of  our  Pacific  lands  the 
newspapers  pride  themselves  upon  the 
fact  that  they  disseminate  the  truth, 
that  no  interview  is  printed  until  it  has 
the  approval  of  the  man  interviewed. 
The  truthfulness  of  these  papers  in 
local  matters  is  astonishing,  especially 
to  the  American,  but  when  these  same 
papers  speak  of  other  countries  of  the 
Pacific  it  is  impossible  for  them  to 
verify  their  information.  They  publish 
what    is    sent   to    them    and    copy    from 


foreign    journals,    and,    alas,    all    is    not 
well. 

Men  wish  to  do  that  which  is  right, 
and  if  it  is  not  too  difficult  they  will  do 
the  right  thing  always.  It  seems  to  me, 
therefore,  that  it  is  the  duty  of  this 
body  to  make  it  easy  for  the  journalists 
of  the  Pacific  to  learn  the  truth  about 
one  another's  countries,  especially  the 
pleasant,  uplifting  and  encouraging 
truths. 

You  have  accepted  by  resolution  the 
services  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  and  I 
feel  that  its  chief  object  should  now 
be  to  aid  in  disseminating  among  all 
countries  of  the  Pacific  the  truth  about 
the  conditions  concerning  each  and  the 
actual  modes  of  living  and  being  of 
their  peoples.  If  we  can  establish  here 
at  the  ocean  crossroads  a  clearing  house 
of  accurate  information;  if  from  this 
central  station  we  can  send  in  every 
direction  the  cable  and  wireless  items 
that  are  dropped  here,  it  will  be  splen- 
did for  Pacific  journalism.  I  believe 
that  here  in  Honolulu  men  of  experi- 
ence in  press  matters  would  know  best 
as  to  the  items  of  news  that  each  Pa- 
cific country  would  wish  flashed  for- 
ward to  it  and  if  the  Pan-Pacific  Union 
can  serve  in  establishing  such  a  central 
news  gathering  and  disseminating  or- 
ganization its  force  is  at  your  disposal 
in  the  attempt.  All  that  would  be 
needed  to  make  it  a  success  will  be 
your    cooperation. 

It  is  for  the  Executive  Committee 
now  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Press  Confer- 
ence to  cooperate  with  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union  to  establish  the  service  that  you 


FIRST    PAN-PACIFIC    PRESS    CONFERENCE. 


95 


desire  and  to  set  the  countries  and 
peoples  of  the  Pacific  press  of  the 
world   in  their  true  light. 

The  President  of  the  Tress  Congress 
of  the  World  has  suggested  that  a  Pan- 
Pacific  School  of  Journalism  he  estab- 
lished here  at  the  ocean  crossroads. 
The  Pan-Pacific  Union  will  gladly  co- 
operate with  Dean  Walter  Williams  and 
the  journalists  of  the  Pacific  who  are 
looking  forward  to  such  an  inter-racial 
journalistic  school. 

The  proceedings  of  this  Pan-Pacific 
Press  Conference,  a  hook  of  about  one 
hundred  pages,  will  be  printed  and. pub- 
lished immediately  and  wc  trust  that 
within  a  week  several  hundred  copies 
will  be  on  their  way  to  Washington 
where  the  Disarmament  Conference  is 
about  to  open  its  sessions.  It  has  been 
intimated  that  the  views  expressed  by 
the  journalists  of  the  Pacific,  may  have 
a  valuable  bearing  at  this  time  in  Wash- 
ington. 

It  may  be  that  an  informal  conference 
of  the  press  men  of  the  Pacific  will  be 
held  in  Washington,  as  there  will  be  a 
quorum  of  the  Trustees  of  the  Pan- 
Pacific  Union  in  that  city  during  the 
Disarmament  Conference.  It  has  been 
suggested  that  at  the  Pan-Pacific  Com- 
mercial Conference,  to  be  held  in  Hono- 
lulu next  September,  that  there  be  a 
section  composed  of  the  owners  of 
newspapers  and  publications  in  Pacific 
lands.  This  matter  will  be  taken  up 
and  duly  considered.  If,  as  it  is  hoped, 
the  President  of  the  United  States  will 
be  with  us  in  Hawaii  next  September, 
it  may  be  possible  that  an  informal 
conference   of   presidents    and    premiers 


of  Pacific  lands  may  be  brought  about 
in  which  case  it  may  be  well  to  hold 
a  second  Pan-Pacific  Press  Conference 
as  the  leading  newspaper  men  of  the 
Pacific  would  undoubtedly  visit  Hono- 
lulu   on    that    occasion. 

The  Pan- Pacific  Union  is  seeking  to 
get  the  leading  men  of  all  lines  of 
thought  and  action  in  Pacific  lands  in 
personal  touch  with  one  another.  We 
have  brought  together  the  leading 
scientists  of  the  Pacific  and  they  are 
well  organized  in  a  body  that  will  carry 
on  and  meet  again.  The  same  is  true 
of  the  educators  and  now  also  of  the 
press  men  of  the  Pacific.  Next  will  be 
the  gathering  of  the  leading  business 
giants  of  Pacific  lands.  There  was  once 
a  saying  among  business  men  that  there 
is  no  friendship  in  business,  but  this  is 
no  longer  a  truism.  The  Pan-Pacific 
Union  holds  that  there  should  be  no 
business  but  friendship,  and  this  will 
come  true. 

I  cannot  but  be  grateful  for  the  kind- 
ly expressions  that  some  of  the  speak- 
ers have  voiced  concerning  my  personal 
part  in  the  work  of  the  Pan-Pacific 
Union.  I  am  grateful  because  it  has 
made  me  certain  that  you  go  back  to 
your  homes  in  perfect  assurance  that 
whatever  the  Pan-Pacific  Union  can  do 
to  serve  you  between  your  meetings, 
to  aid  you  in  making  a  permanent  suc- 
cess of  your  Pan-Pacific  Congress  body 
that  it  will  do.  We  have  asked  for 
your  cooperation  and  you  have  accepted 
ours.  In  whatever  manner  you  wish  us 
to  be  of  service  to  you  it  is  but  for 
you  to  call  upon  us  and  I  trust  you  will 
call  upon  us  for  we  are  here  to  serve. 


HONOLULU   STAR-BULLETIN,    LTD. 


HR 


■    ■.    :'  . 


y 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA-LOS  ANG 


L  007  772  0 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  ^B^RY  f  AC'1- 


AA    000  423  464    7 


■ 


*S 


im 


Y 


w. 


m 


>- 


h 


L 


w 


N 


s 


M* 


